Third Peloponnesian Invasion of Attica.

*peloponnh/sioi kai\ oi( cu/mmaxoi: designation for the whole Peloponnesian alliance, as in c. 26.1, 4; ii. 47. 4; 71. 1; iv. 2. 2. For *peloponnh/sioi alone in this comprehensive sense, cf. c. 2.1, and see on ii. 13. 1.—2.

a(/ma tw=| si/tw| a)kma/zonti: indicates more sharply than tou= si/tou a)kma/zontos (ii. 19. 5; 79. 4) the beginning of the ripening of the corn. For the pred. partic., see Kr. Spr. 50, 11, 13. See App. on ii. 4. 11 (Steup).—3.

h(gei=to . . . basileu/s: parenthetical, as ii. 47. 6; iv. 2. 3; the relation of the other clauses also is the same as there.— 4.

e)gkaqezo/menoi: here, as in iv. 2. 4, indicates more clearly than kaqezo/menoi (ii. 47. 7) a definite place from which raids were made.—5.

prosbolai\ kte(.: cf. ii. 22. 7.—

w(/sper ei)w/qesan: sc. gi/gnesqai. Cf. i. 132. 26.—

e)gi/gnonto: pass. of poiei=n. H. 820. See on i. 73. 1.—6.

o(/ph| parei/koi: wherever opportunity offered, as Arr. Anab. vi. 9. 2. The Schol. explains, o(/pou e)nede/xeto kai\ e)nexw/rei. Cf. iv. 36. 7 kata\ to\ ai)ei\ parei=kon, Plato Symp. 187e kaq) o(/son parei/kei, Rep. 374e o(/son g' a)\n du/namis parei/kh|, Soph. Phil. 1048 ei)/ moi parei/koi.—to\n plei=ston o(/milon: the main body, as opp. to the small predatory bands which kept up the devastation. o(/milos in this sense seems to be Ionic and poetic. See Proc. Amer. Phil. Assoc. vol. xxii. p. xix.—7.

to\ mh\ . . . kakourgei=n: for to\ mh/ with inf. after verbs of hin dering, see GMT. 811; H. 963, 1029; Kr. Spr. 67, 12, 4; Kühn. 479, 1 and 516, N. 9 l.—

tw=n o(/plwn: camping places, as in i. 111. 6; vi. 64. 20; vii. 28. 8.

e)mmei/nantes: aor. partic., as in ii. 23. 10; viii. 31. 16. See App. on ii. 19. 14.—

ou(=: depends on ta\ siti/a. Cf. ii. 23. 11 o(/sou ei)=xon ta\ e)pith/deia. G. 1085, 5; H. 729 d. See on i. 48. 2. —9.

a)nexw/rhsan . . . kata\ po/leis: the same formula in c. 26. 17; ii. 78. 8; v. 83. 10.

All Lesbos except Methymna immediately revolts from the Athenians, who had been informed of the designs of the Mytileneans.

*le/sbos plh\n *mhqu/mnhs a)pe/sth: Mytilene, which was itself under oligarchical rule, had extended its authority over the three smaller places, Antissa, Pyrrha, and Eresos (c. 18. 5); only Methymna on the northern coast retained its democratic constitution and connexion with Athens. See W. Herbst, Der Abfall Mytilenes, 1861, and Leithäuser, Der Abfall Mytilenes, 1874.—

boulhqe/ntes: agreeing kata\ cu/nesin with *le/sbos. Kr. Spr. 58, 4, 2; Kühn. 359, 3a. Cf. c. 79. 10; i. 24. 9.—3.

pro\ tou= pole/mou: cf. c. 13. 5 kai\ pa/lai . . . e)/ti e)n th=| ei)rh/nh|. It was doubtless after the conclusion of the triakontou/teis spondai/, 445 B.C., as the Schol. says, ou) prosede/canto, i(/na mh\ lu/swsi ta\s triakontou/teis sponda/s. See W. Herbst, ibid. p. 10, 22.—

a)ll) . . . ou) prosede/canto: the full const. would be a)ll) ou)k a)pe/sthsan: oi( ga\r *lakedaimo/nioi ou) prosede/canto. For similar brachylogy, cf. i. 26. 17. As the clause refers only to boulhqe/ntes, it is to be construed parenthetically. prosede/canto, as c. 13. 6; i. 45. 2; ii. 70. 10, without expressed obj., tou\s lo/gous, or a similar word, being understood. —4.

a)nagkasqe/ntes: the explanatory partics. with me/n, de/ are placed after the leading verb with effect similar to the me/n and de/ clauses in ii. 93. 19, 22. —

kai\ tau/thn: i.e. th\n to/te, even this revolt, as opp. to that which they had failed to make.

tw=n te ga\r . . . metapempo/menoi h)=san: explanatory of pro/teron h)\ dienoou=nto, as 9 ff. *tene/dioi ga/r, . . . *le/sbou is of a)nagkasqe/ntes. te is co-ord. with kai/ before o(/sa.—6. th\n xw=sin . . . oi)kodo/mhsin . . . poi/hsin: the art. covers the three substs. with their genitives. Cf. c. 56. 7, and see on i. 120. 10. xw=sis tw=n lime/nwn means the building of moles, by which the entrance to the harbours was narrowed and could at will be closed by a chain. 7.

e)pe/menon: takes two consts.: a) acc. with inf., th\n poi/hsin telesqh=nai (cf. c. 26. 13; Soph. Trach. 1176); b) the acc. alone, o(/sa e)/dei a)fike/sqai. See Haase, Lucubr. Thuc. p. 110 f. So perie/mene, vii. 20. 16. Thus most of the editt. explain. Cl. makes o(/sa e)/dei a)fike/sqai subj. of a)fike/sqai understood, on the ground that e)pime/nein does not take the acc. alone; but cf. Eur. Suppl. 624; Plato Rep. 361 d.—8.

toco/tas: Seythian bowmen, hired by the ruling aristocracy, and always ready to serve as mercenaries.—

a(\ metapempo/menoi h)=san: whatever they were engaged in fetching. Cf. ii. 67. 9 h(=n poliorkou=n, and see App. on i. 1. 5. Kr. Spr. 56, 3, 1; Kühn. 353, N. 3. Cobet's conjecture metapepemme/noi h)=san is unnecessary, as is shown by L. Herbst, Gegen Cobet, p. 37-39. On the subject of periphrases with ei)=nai, see Amer. J. of Ph. iv. p. 297.

*tene/dioi: members of the Attic symmachy (vii. 57. 22). They feared the influence of Mytilene on the Aeolic coast, as did Methymna on the island. See W. Herbst, ibid. p. 24.—10.

*mutilhnai/wn: the earlier form, acc. to inscriptions and coins; later, and therefore in many Mss., *mitulhnai/wn. See Meisterhaus, Grammatik der Att. Inschriften^{2} p. 23.—

i)di/a| kata\ sta/sin: on account of factions. Cf. kata\ sta/sin i)di/a|, c. 34. 3; kata\ sta/sin, c. 62. 19; 68. 17; 82. 11; v. 33. 4; kata\ th\n sta/sin, viii. 106. 21. i)di/a| also ii. 67. 4. The phrase gives the motive of mhnutai\ gi/gnontai, to which pro/cenoi *)aqhnai/wn is added by way of explanation. Aristotle, Polit. v. 4, mentions Doxander as the Attic proxenus who, in revenge for the rejection of his proposal of marriage for his sons with the daughters of the aristocrat Timophanes, betrayed the plot to the Athenians.—11.

mhnutai\ gi/gnontai: the same periphrasis as in i. 132. 31; viii. 50. 15. Cf. also c. 58. 13 (eu)erge/ths); i. 4. 3 (oi)kisth/s); i. 37. 12 (dikasth/s); c. 59. 12; i. 136. 9 (i(ke/ths); c. 40. 31 (prodo/ths); ii. 43. 8 (e)rasth/s); c. 23. 13; i. 35. 12; v. 9. 38; viii. 86. 23 (kwluth/s); c. 42. 7; v. 30. 2; viii. 45. 9 (dida/skalos); c. 105. 14; i. 95. 4; vi. 76. 13; vii. 56. 19 (h(gemw/n); viii. 51. 4 (e)ca/ggelos). See Dissen ad Dem. xviii. 72.—12.

cunoiki/zousi/ te th\n *le/sbon e)s th\n *mutilh/nhn: the Schol. explains, a)/kontas tou\s *lesbi/ous a)nagka/zousin e)s th\n *mutilh/nhn oi)kh=sai. e)bou/lonto ga\r e)k mia=s po/lews o(rmw/menoi polemei=n. Cf. i. 58. § 2. This view is held also by Goell., Bl., Kr. and Jowett. But it is incompatible with c. 18. § 1; so that political concentration must be meant, as in the case of Athens under Theseus, ii. 15. § 2, the communal independence of the other places being abolished. The purpose (pres. cunoiki/zousi) is in part carried out in c. 18. § 1. So explain also Arn., St., and Böhme. See W. Herbst, ibid. p. 19.—13.

*lakedaimoni/wn: cf. c. 5. 13.—14.

*boiwtw=n: esp. the Thebans. Cf. c. 5. 13; 13. 7.—

cuggenw=n o)/ntwn: since Lesbos was considered a Boeotian colony. Strab. xiii. 1. 3. Cf. vii. 57. 24; viii. 100. 16. See Curtius, Hist. of Greece, i. p. 127 f.—

e)pi\ a)posta/sei: with a view to a revolt. Cf. i. 3. 9; 37. 8; 73. 14.—

e)pei/gontai: trans. also iv. 5. 9; vi. 100. 5; viii. 9. 2.—15.

ei) mh/ tis: with fut. indic. a common expression of warning. Cf. iv. 68. 28; viii. 53. 18; 83. 13; 91. 12. On ei) with the fut. indic. in minatory and monitory conditions, see GMT. 447; Gildersleeve, Trans. Amer. Philol. Assoc. 1876, p. 5 ff., Amer. J. of Ph., ix. p. 491 f., xiii. p. 123 f.—

prokatalh/yetai: shall prevent, abs., as in c. 3. 9; 46. 25; v. 57. 4; vi. 18. 13. See on i. 57. 15. —

h)/dh: forthwith, belongs to the prot., as h)/dh in viii. 91. 13, and e)n ta/xei in v. 57. 5; 64. 2.—

sterh/sesqai: pass. also in c. 39. 44. sterhqh/somai seems to occur only in late writers. See Veitch s.v.—

au)tou/s: i.e. tou\s *)aqhnai/ous.

After fruitless remonstrance against the preparations of the Mytileneans and the proposed ‘synoecismus’ of the island, the Athenians detain 10 Mytilenean ships with their crews, and send to surprise Mytilene 40 triremes, whose coming was, however, betrayed to the Mytileneans.

h)=san ga\r kte(.: the causal sent. in parataxis before the main one, not rare in Thuc. See on i. 31. 7. —

tetalaipwrhme/noi: Cl. considers this a mid., as also in c. 78. 3; iv. 27. 2; 35. 12; vii. 28. 10, with the same force as the act. in i. 99. 5; 134. 9. But it seems better, with St., to regard it as pass. in all the passages cited. Cf. Plut. Brut. 37 to\ sw=ma talaipwrou/menon, and Isoc. viii. 19 (o( po/lemos) tetalaipw/rhken h(ma=s. The act. occurs with u(po/ in ii. 101. 19.—2.

a)/rti kaqistame/nou kai\ a)kma/zontos: pred., being just fairly afoot and at its height. a)/rti kaqistame/nou as in c. 68. 29. On a)/rti see Lobeck ad Phryn. p. 20; Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 70 f. a)kma/zein also of pestilence, ii. 49. 27. Steup, comparing both this passage and c. 68. 29 with kaqesthkui=a h(liki/a in ii. 36. 9, understands the reference to be to the middle period of the war, in which case, of course, the ten years', not the twenty-seven years', war would be meant.—3.

me/ga: great, i.e. difficult. Cf. ii. 45. 2; 89. 45; vi. 12. 16.—

prospolemw/sasqai: obs. the force of the middle. The Schol. rightly explains, pro\s toi=s ou)=si polemi/ois . . . kai\ au)th\n polemi/an poih=sai. Cf. v. 98. 6.— 5.

prw=ton: acc. to most and best Mss., without art. Both forms are about equally common.—

mei=zon me/ros ne/montes . . . ei)=nai: giving too much weight to the wish that it might not be true. For the sentiment, cf. iv. 108. § 4; v. 113, and the evident imitation of the present passage in Philo Leg. ad Caium 10 plei=ston dido/ntes me/ros tw=| mh\ bou/lesqai . . . dokei=n w)mo/n. Also Dio C. xxxvii. 11 th=| boulh/sei ple/on h)\ th=| duna/mei ne/mwn, Dem. iii. 19 o(\ ga\r bou/letai, tou=q) e(/kastos kai\ oi)/etai, Caes. Bell. Gall. iii. 18 fere libenter homines id, quod volunt, credunt. For the phrase mei=zon me/ros ne/mein, cf. c. 48. 2; i. 71. 7; vi. 88. 10. Also Eur. Suppl. 241 ne/montes tw=| fqo/nw| ple/on me/ros, Hec. 868 tw=| t) o)/xlw| ple/on ne/meis, Anliope (frg. 183) ne/mwn to\ plei=ston h(me/ras tou/tw| me/ros.—6.

a)lhqh= ei)=nai: sc. ta\ kathgorhme/na from ta\s katthgori/as. Cl. explains ‘without reference to any definite noun,’ comparing o)/ntwn a)kri/twn, iv. 20. 5.—8.

th\n cunoi/kisin: found only here in Thuc., and prob. not elsewhere unless in late writers.—9.

prokatalabei=n: see on c. 2. 15.

e)capinai/ws: as in c. 34. 17; 70. 25; i. 117. 1; ii. 3. 2; 48. 4; 93. 15; iv. 25. 48; vi. 100. 14. This form, as well as e)capi/nhs (c. 89. 20; i. 50. 21; iv. 36. 10; 111. 12; 115. 13; v. 10. 33,—cf. Plat. Rep. 621 b; Ps.-Dem. lix. 99; Arist. H. An. 636 a 31), seems to be lonic and poetic, being used by Xenophon only, of other Attic prose writers. The regular Attic forms, e)cai/fnhs and ai)fnidi/ws, occur also in both Thuc. and Xenophon. See Diener, de Serm. Thuc. 1889, pp. 24-26.

e)shgge/lqh ga\r . . . e)pipesei=n a)/fnw: explanation of pe/mponsin e)capinai/ws. Hence the preceding sent, must be considered parenthetical. The following dependent clause, however, h)\n me\n cumbh=| . . . polemei=n, contains in the usual const., kai\ . . . me\n . . . de/ (cf. i. 19. 1; 22. 1, etc.), the execution of the task implied in pe/mpousin.—13. *malo/entos: this epithet of Apollo seems to occur only in Lesbos. Cf. Schol. Patm. (Rev. de Philol. N. S. i. p. 185; cf. Hellanicus ap. Steph. Byz. s.v. *malo/eis) w(s . . . e(orth/] *malo/eis *)apo/llwn: ou(=tos para\ *mitulhnai/ois e)tima=to, a)po\ toiau/ths de/ tinos ai)ti/as. *mantw\ h( *teiresi/ou quga/thr peri\ tou\s to/pous xoreu/ousa tou/tous mh=lon xrusou=n a)po\ tou= periderai/ou e)kpeso\n a)pw/lesen: eu)/cato ou)=n, ei) eu(/roi, i(ero\n i(dru/sein tw=| qew=|. eu(rou=sa de\ to\ mh=lon to\ i(ero\n i(dru/sato, kai\ *malo/eis *)apo/llwn e)nteu=qen par) au)toi=s e)tima=to. The explanation of Meister (Gr. Dial. i. p. 65) is most prob. correct: god of Malea. Cf. c. 4. 18. For other explanations, see Wilamowitz, Isyllos, p. 99 f. and Preller-Robert, Gr. Myth. I.^{4} p. 252.—14.

e)pipesei=n: aor. without a)/n after e)lpi/s, as ii. 80. 11; iv. 70. 20; v. 9. 27; 102. 4; vi. 87. 18; viii. 40. 14; 86. 34; so after e)lpi/zw, iv. 13. 4; 24. 10; 80. 3; vii. 21. 6. G. 1286; H. 948 a, 952; Kühn. 389, N. 8. See App. on ii. 3. 8. —15.

h)\n me\n cumbh=| h( pei=ra: the Schol. explains cumbh=| by katorqwqh=|. There is an ellipsis of some apod. like eu)= e)/xein or tau=ta a)/rista ei)=nai (cf. i. 82. 12), which is easily supplied from the second member of the hypothetical sentence. Such an ellipsis occurs possibly also in iv. 13. 14. Cf. Hom. A 135; Hdt. viii. 62. 3, and see SauppeTowle on Plato Prot. 311 d. GMT. 482; H. 904 a; Kr. Spr. 54, 12, 12; Kühn. 577, 3 c.—

ei) de\ mh/: otherwise, after h)\n me/n, GMT. 478; H. 906; Kr. Spr. 65, 5, 12.—16.

ei)pei=n: depends on keleu/ousin implied in pe/mpousin.—nau=s, tei/xh: without art. in formulae of conditions of peace, also i. 101. 12; 108. 14; 117. 14.—

paradou=nai: after ei)pei=n, to command, as in i. 131. 9; ii. 6. 7. GMT. 99; H. 946 b.

ta\s de\ de/ka trih/reis: the art. on account of the rel. clause following, as in c. 22. 33; viii. 15. 9. Cf. also viii. 26. 2. Kühn. 465, 13; Kr. Spr. 50, 2, 7.—19.

para\ sfa=s: the reflexive pron. in a dependent clause refers to the subj. of the primary clause. G. 987; H. 683 a. Cf. c. 108. 14; i. 20. 3; 115. 23; vi. 32. 9. —

kata\ to\ cummaxiko/n: the word is rare except in Thucydides. Cf. c. 91. 7; i. 107. 27; ii. 22. 17; 101. 15; iv. 61. 15; v. 6. 6; vii. 20. 5; 33. 22. —

parou=sai:=parageno/menai, hence para\ sfa=s. Cf. gunai=kes pa/reisin . . . e)pi\ to\n ta/fon, ii. 34. 11. Also c. 8. 3; vi. 62. 19; 88. 51; vii. 50. 1.—20.

e)s fulakh\n e)poih/santo: as viii. 1. 25 e)s a)sfa/leian poiei=sqai. Cf. also e)nto\s poiei=sqai, ii. 83. 26; vi. 67. 9.

diaba\s kte(.: obs. the effect of the five parties., which involuntarily portray the haste of the messenger.—

*geraisto/n: Schol. *geraisto\s a)krwth/rion *eu)boi/as e)/xon lime/na. Cf. Hom. g 177; Hdt. viii. 7. 5; ix. 105. 6. Livy (xxxi. 45) calls the harbour nobilis Euboeae portus, and Strabo (x. 1. 7) mentions the adjacent town with the celebrated temple of Poseidon. It is now called Mantelo. See Leake, Northern Greece, ii. p. 423; Bursian, Geogr. v. Gr. ii. pp. 399, 434.—23.

a)nagome/nhs: the pres. as in i. 117. 4; 137. 7; ii. 90. 13.—

e)pituxw/n: with gen. also vii. 25. 8. Cf. Xen. Oec. 2. 3; 12. 20; Plato Phil. 61 d; Ar. Plut. 245. With the dat. c. 75. 20; viii. 14. 1; 34. 3; Lys. xii. 12. Kr. Spr. 47, 14, 2.—

plw=|: the Schol. explains a)nti\ tou= eu)ploi/a|. Cf. i. 137. 13; Hes. Op. 630; Ant. v. 24; Xen. Anab. v. 9. 33. So most editt. explain. But Arn. takes plw=| xrhsa/menos as merely opp. to pezh=| e)pi\ *geraisto\n e)lqw/n, comparing vi. 97. 8, ou)/te plou=n ou)/te o(do\n pollh\n a)pe/xei, where plou=s is thus opp. to o(do/s.— tritai=os: pred. adj. for adverb. G. 926; H. 619; Kr. Spr. 57, 5, 4.

oi( de\ kte(: ‘illi vero neque in Maloentem exierunt et praeterea etiam imperfecta murorum portuumque opera obstruxerunt et excubias apud eos egerunt.’ Haacke. See App.—

e)s to\n *malo/enta: Steph. Byz. *malo/eis *)apo/llwn e)n *le/sbw|: kai\ o( to/pos tou= i(erou= *malo/eis. Since the reference is to the temple there is no objection to the preposition.—26.

fraca/menoi: having blocked up, the walls prob. by means of palisades and battlements, the harbours by means of ships that were sunk.

Beginning of hostilities. Conclusion of an armistice, during which the Mytileneans send an embassy to persuade the Athenians that their designs are harmless and to induce them to recall their fleet. At the same time they secretly appeal to Sparta for aid.

kai\ oi( *)aqhnai=oi . . . w(s e(w/rwn: one of the cases rare in Att. prose where the subj. placed before the conj. does not belong to the leading clause. Cf. c. 5. 1; iv. 78. 1; vii. 32. 1; Hdt. ix. 61. 1. Cobet (Mnem. N. S. viii. p. 123 sq.) would omit oi( strathgoi/. But Thuc. nowhere uses a)pagge/llein with so comprehensive a subj. as oi( *)aqhnai=oi.—2. w(s e(w/rwn: sc. ta\ u(po\ tw=n *mutilhnai/wn prasso/mena, the obj. being unexpressed, as often with ai)sqa/nesqai (c. 22. 22; i. 95. 21, etc.). So i)do/ntes, iv. 25. 49.—

ta\ e)pestalme/na: cf. c. 3. 16.—3.

e)sakouo/ntwn: give heed, comply. See on i. 82. 11.—

e)s po/lemon kaqi/stanto: commenced hostilities (cf. c. 5. 2; i. 23. 28; 99. 14; ii. 9. 2), according to the instructions mentioned c. 3. 17.

a)para/skeuoi kai\ e)cai/fnhs: pred. to a)nagkasqe/ntes polemei=n. Cf. c. 2. 4. For similar combination of adj. (or partic.) and adv., cf. c. 13. 12; 34. 17; 42. 23; 82. 13; i. 39. 2; 63. 7; vii. 32. 11. Kr. Spr. 59, 2, 3.—6.

w(s e)pi\ naumaxi/a|: with a view to a seafight, as in vi. 34. 34. Placed thus before the prep., w(s implies the ‘purpose’ of the subject. For distinction between the dat. and the acc. in this const., see L. Herbst, Philol. xlii. p. 675.—

pro\ tou= lime/nos: ‘as there were two ports of Mytilene, w(=n o( no/tios kleisto\s trihriko\s nausi\ penth/konta, o( de\ bo/reios me/gas kai\ baqu\s xw/mati skepazo/menos (Strab. xiii. 2. 2), it is evident that the trihriko\s limh/n is meant here.’ St.—7.

h)/dh: now, in their present strait, what before they had not been willing to do. h)/dh often thus indicates a change of conditions. Cf. i. 18. 28; 49. 27.— 8.

to\ parauti/ka: for the present, i.e. until they should be better prepared. Cf. i. 27. 4; iv. 121. 7; vi. 83. 14. —9.

e)pieikei=: i.e. if not strictly in accordance with the right, still fair and acceptable; so also in c. 9. 10; i. 76. 20. Cf. Arist. Rhet. 1374 a e)/stin e)pieike\s to\ para\ to\n gegramme/non no/mon di/kaion.—a)pope/myasqai: get rid of; usually dismiss, as in Hdt. i. 33. 3; 120. 35; ii. 25. 13; vii. 105. 3; Xen. Cyrop. i. 4. 27.

a)pede/canto: sc. tou\s lo/gous. See on c. 2. 4.—11.

*le/sbw| pa/sh|: i.e. not merely against Mytilene. Cf. ii. 80. 2 *)akarnani/an pa=san, although Oeniadae is excluded, as here Methymna.

a)nokwxh/n: cf. i. 40. 16; 66. 9; iv. 38. 4; 117. 7; v. 25. 13, in all which passages St. (Qu. Gr.^{2} p. 44) has shown this to be the correct form, not a)nakwxh/.—13. tw=n diaballo/ntwn: partic. pres. of an enduring relation, as oi( e)pago/menoi, ii. 2. 22; oi( prodido/ntes, ii. 5. 32. Kühn. 382, 4 b. The pro/cenoi of c. 2. 11 are meant.—14.

ei)/ pws pei/seian ta\s nau=s a)pelqei=n: sc. tou\s *)aqhnai/ous as obj. of pei/seian. The const. of pei/qein with inf. and subj. acc. is unusual. For the const. of the opt., see GMT. 489.—

w(s sfw=n . . . newteriou/ntwn: with the understanding that they did not intend to make any innovation. GMT. 864. Cf. vii. 15. 13. The subj. of the gen. abs. is here the same as that of the leading elause, as in c. 13. 30; vii. 48. 12. GMT. 850; Kr. Spr. 47, 4, 2; Kühn. 494 a.

e)n tou/tw|: i.e. while they were waiting for an answer from Athens. —

a)poste/llousi . . . e)n th=| *male/a| pro\s bore/an th=s po/lews: see App.— 18.

toi=s a)po\ tw=n *)aqhnai/wn: toi=s is neut. as in i. 127. 5. au)ta/ is to be supplied as subj. of proxwrh/sein. Cf. iv. 92. 36 pisteu/santas tw=| qew=| pro\s h(mw=n e)/sesqai, where the subj. of e)/sesqai is to be supplied from tw=| qew=|. Kr. Spr. 61, 6, 8; Kühn. 476, 2. A comparison with i. 127. 5 and the passages there cited shows that Bk.'s conjecture, *)aqhnw=n, is unnecessary.

talaipw/rws: aegre, in Thuc. only here, and elsewhere in Attic seldom (Ar. Eccles. 54); freq. in late writers.—20.

dia\ tou= pela/gous: i.e. not touching at the intervening islands, as was commonly done for the sake of security and comfort; so also c. 33.4; 69. 2; vi. 13. 12, and, in the same sense, pela/giai ple/ousai, viii. 39. 16; 60. 12. Cf. Hom. g 174 pe/lagos me/son te/mnein.—au)toi=s e)/prasson, o(/pws tis boh/qeia h(/cei: Cl., who understands au)toi=s of the Lacedaemonians, explains au)toi=s e)/prasson, negotiated with them, comparing iv. 106. 11; 110. 8; v. 76. 15; viii. 5. 22. But it seems better, with the other editors, to understand au)toi=s of the Lesbians, and, with Kr. and Bm., to render here, and in all the passages cited, negotiated (or worked) for them. Cf. Dem. ix. 59 e)/pratte *fili/ppw|, worked for Philip, Plut. Alc. 24 pratto/ntwn *boiwtw=n *lesbi/ois. Moreover, in three passages where it is beyond doubt that Thuc. meant negotiate with, the phrase is pra/ssein pro/s tina, c. 28. 10; i. 131. 6; ii. 5. 32. St., though referring au)toi=s to the Lesbians, makes it depend on h(/cei. Cf. c. 5. 12, and for dat. with such verbs see on i. 13. 12.

Hostilities are resumed, but after an unsuccessful sortie the Mytileneans retire and await help from the Peloponnesian alliance.

oi( e)k tw=n *)aqhnw=n: prolepsis, as in i. 8. 8; iv. 16. 17, and frequently. G. 1225, 1; H. 788 a; Kr. Spr. 50, 8, 10; Kühn. 448 a.—2.

ou)de\n pra/cantes: =a)/praktoi. Cf. iv. 97. 8; viii. 91. 2. —

e)s po/lemon kaqi/stanto: the expression is somewhat peculiar, since hostilities had already occurred between the Mytileneans and the Athenians (c. 4. 3).—3.

h( a)/llh *le/sbos: see on c. 2. 2.—

ou(=toi: refers kata\ cu/nesin to *mhqu/mnhs. Cf. c. 2. 2 *le/sbos . . . boulhqe/ntes.—4. *)/imbrioi kai\ *lh/mnioi: Attic cleruchs, often mentioned together as tried allies, iv. 28. 18; v. 8. 7. Lemnos had been occupied by Miltiades (Hdt. vi. 140); Imbros prob. about the same time. —5.

tines: in Attic allowed between the art. and subst. of the dependent gen. only when another modifier follows the article. Kr. Spr. 47, 9, 20. The reference is prob. to the Tenedians. W. Herbst, p. 24.

e)pi\ to\ tw=n *)aqhnai/wn strato/pedon: i.e. against the camp which the Athenians had established as a nau/staqmon, a station on land (see on c. 6. 11), near their fleet. The e)/codos, which the Mytileneans made pandhmei/, as well as e)phuli/santo, is to be understood of an expedition by land, and the ma/xh as a pezomaxi/a.—8. ou)k e)/lasson e)/xontes: not being worsted. See on i. 105. 23. Cf. Xen. Anab. i. 10. 8 mei=on e)/xwn. The pres. partic., as with nika=n (i. 13. 31), of enduring results. —

e)phuli/santo: “held the field,” as in iv. 134. 9. Schol. plhsi/on tw=n polemi/wn nukto\s au)li/sasqai. This single exhibition of confidence is co-ord. with the whole (oi)/ te e)pi/steusan sfi/sin au)toi=s); or, perhaps better, the effect (e)phuli/santo) is co-ord. with the cause (ou)/te e)pi/steusan kte(.).

e)/peita: from this time on. Placed emphatically at the beginning of the whole following narration, it includes the events of the next chapter, the explanatory sent. H. 12-17, kai\ ga\r . . . e)kpe/mpousin, being parenthetical.—

e)k *peloponnh/sou . . . ei) prosge/noito/ ti kinduneu/ein: const. ei) e)k *peloponnh/sou prosge/noito/ ti, kai\ met) a)/llhs paraskeuh=s, (ei) prosge/noito/ ti,) boulo/menoi kinduneu/ein. Goeller. Thueydides's propensity to put pred. modifiers before the conj. leads to an irregularity in the construction. Cl. thinks from what follows that Theban help is meant in met) a)/llhs paraskeuh=s, but Steup objects that Boeotia was at that time only a land power (cf. i. 27. 14; ii. 9. 11).

au)toi=s a)fiknei=tai: for the terminal dat., rare in prose after simple verbs, see on *sami/ois h)=lqe, i. 13. 12. Kühn. 423, 5.—14.

e)pi/ploun: i.e. the 40 ships mentioned e. 3. 10, 25; 4. 1. The whole passage clearly shows that Thucydides dates the revolt of the Mytileneans from their refusal of the demands of the Athenians (c. 4. § 1). —

meta\ th\n ma/xhn u(/steron: for the pleonasm, cf. i. 3. 2 pro\ tw=n *trwikw=n pro/teron, v. 24. 9 meta\ ta\s sponda\s ou) pollw=| u(/steron.—15. trih/rh a)/llhn: i.e. besides the one dispatched e. 4. 16, doubtless in order to announce the increased danger.—16.

kai\ e)kpe/mpousin: sc. oi( *mutilhnai=oi, with change of subj. in paratactic narration. Cf. c. 50. 13.

The Athenians prepare to invest the city.

e)pirrwsqe/ntes: cf. iv. 36. 12; vi. 93. 4; vii. 2. 9; 7. 15; 17. 10; viii. 89. 8; 106. 21.—3.

parh=san: =parege/nonto. See on c. 3. 19.—

ou)de\n i)sxuro/n: the adj. with subst. force, “no energetic effort.” Cf. ou)de\n a)lhqe/s, v. 45. 12; bi/aion ou)de/n, vi. 54. 16; ti ai)sxro/n, iv. 27. 11; viii. 9. 14.— 4.

periormisa/menoi to\ pro\s no/ton th=s po/lews: after they had come around to anchor south of the city. But since a part of the fleet must have continued at anchor north of the city (cf. c. 4. 18), kai/, also, was to be ex pected, after periormisa/menoi. See App. —5.

e(kate/rwqen th=s po/lews: see App. —6.

tou\s e)fo/rmous e)p) a)mfote/rois toi=s lime/sin e)poiou=nto: the two harbours which Strabo (xiii. 2. 2) describes, were formed, somewhat like the two Syracusan harbours, by an island lying in front of the city. e)pi/, which is wanting with e)formei=n in vii. 3. 21, is repeated, for the sake of clearness, with e)fo/rmous e)poiou=nto.

th=s me\n qala/sshs ei)=rgon mh\ xrh=sqai: unusual limiting inf. after th=s qala/sshs ei)/rgein (see on i. 141. 16); or perhaps the natural obj. of the inf. is construed proleptically with ei)=rgon (Kr. Spr. 61, 6, 8; Kühn. 600, 3 b). For mh/ with inf. after verbs of hindering, see GMT. 807; H. 1029. —9.

oi( a)/lloi *le/sbioi: i.e. from the cities allied with Mytilene. Cf. c. 5. 3, and see on c. 2. 2.—10.

nau/staqmon: here and vi. 49. 18, the base of operations, where material for the ships, as well as provisions for the crews, was kept. In this general sense of station it may properly take both gens., ploi/wn kai\ a)gora=s, after it. —11.

ma=llon: sc. than the southern camp. The station first occupied at Malea was the more important of the two. See on c. 4. 15.—12.

ta\ me\n peri\ *mutilh/nhn: most naturally construed as nom., as in iv. 23. 9. Cf. Xen. Anab. iv. 4. 1 o(/sa e)polemh/qh. This const. is rendered more prob. by the analogy of similar concluding formulae: c. 51. 1; 68. 39; 114. 24; ii. 54. 20; iv. 41. 17; vii. 30. 19; 87. 27. Kr. construes as acc., as in ii. 96. 17; iv. 108. 8; v. 52. 5.

Asopius sent around Peloponnesus with 30 Attic ships, 12 of which go on to Naupactus. Unsuccessful attack upon Oeniadae and Leucas, and death of Asopius.

kai\ peri\ *pelopo/nnhson: as before to Lesbos. On the reading peri/ see App.—4.

tw=n *formi/wnos: of the kindred of Phormio. Kr. Spr. 47, 5, 2. Cf. ii. 34. 5 tw=| au(tou=. h)\ ui(o\n h)\ cuggenh= is epexegetical apposition. Phormio himself, whose close relations with the Acarnanians dated from his command in Naupactus (ii. 69. § 1; 81. § 1; 102. § 1), seems to have died soon after his return to Athens (ii. 103). But see Müller-Strübing, Aristoph. u. d. hist. Kritik, p. 677 ff.

paraple/ousai . . . e)po/rqhsan: cf. c. 91. 20. paraplei=n, sail along the coast, as in c. 32. 1; 33. 9; 34. 1; 95. 10; 112. 26.

a)nasth/sas: of levying troops, as in ii. 68. 3; 96. 1; iv. 77. 11; 90. 2.—

e)p) *oi)nia/das: sc. to carry out during the summer the undertaking which his father had been unable to accomplish the preceding winter. Cf. ii. 102. § 2.—11.

kata\ to\n *)axelw=|on: along the Achelous. kata/, on, along, as in iv. 25. 29.—

o( kata\ gh=n strato/s: refers, as to\n pezo/n (13), to the Acarnanian troops.

*nh/rikon: the same form also in Hom. w 377; in Strabo x. 2. 8 the Mss. vary between *nh/rikos and *nh/ritos.—15. tw=n au)to/qen: as in ii. 25. 18; iv. 29. 10; vi. 25. 13; vii. 34. 9.—16.

frourw=n: as opp. to tw=n au)to/qen cumbohqhsa/ntwn these must be foreigners, possibly Corinthians, as in iv. 42. 17. Cf. c. 94. 4.

kai\ u(/steron kte(.: i.e. they re-embarked and sailed off, then sent back a herald to ask for their dead, as in iv. 44. §6.—18.

e)komi/santo: used esp. of the recovery of prisoners and the corpses of the slain. See on i. 113. 14.

Ambassadors of the Mytileneans present their cause in an assembly of the Peloponnesian allies at Olympia.

e)pi\ th=s prw/ths new/s: cf. c. 4. 16 and 5. 16.—2.

ei)=pon: =e)ke/leusan, as in c. 3. 16. See on i. 78. 10. —

*)olumpi/aze parei=nai: cf. ii. 34. 11; Xen. Anab. i. 2. 2 parh=san ei)s *sa/rdeis. Kühn. 447, N. 4.—3.

oi( a)/lloi cu/mmaxoi: i.e. the rest of the members of the Peloponnesian alliance. Cf. v. 62. 7, and see Steup on Thucydides's freq. use of cu/mmaxoi to indicate members of a confederation or coalition, Rh. Mus. xxxv. p. 323.—4.

h)=n de\ . . . e)ni/ka: explanatory clause inserted parenthetically. The date was Olympiad 88, B.c. 428. —5.

*dwrieu/s: son of Diagoras, victor three times in succession at Olympia (Paus. vi. 7. 1), as well as in numerous other contests (Paus. vi. 7. 4). He fought in the Decelean war on the Spartan side (viii. 35. § 1; Xen. Hell. i. 1. 2; Diod. xiii. 38, 43), and was captured by the Athenians, but on account of his fame as an athlete was released without ransom (Xen. Hell. i. 5. 19; Paus. vi. 7. 4, 5). See Müller, Dorier, iii. 148 ff.—

e)ni/ka: was victor, as in v. 49. 2. For the force of the pres. and impf. of this verb, see GMT. 27; Kr. Spr. 53, 1, 3-4.—

meta\ th\n e(orth/n: generally regarded as celebrated at the first full moon after the summer solstice. But Unger prob. rightly decides for the full moon in August, i.e. the 8th Elean month, Apollonios = Attic Metageitnion. See Philol. xxxiii. p. 227 ff. and Handbuch d. kl. Alterthumsw. i. p. 603 f.; also Nissen, Rh. Mus. xl. p. 349 ff.; and A. Mommsen, Über die Zeit der Olympien, 1891.— 6.

kate/sthsan e)s lo/gous: met in council, sc. as subj. the Peloponnesians. Cf. c. 70. 8; iv. 58. 4.

The unfavourable opinion usually held of allies that revoll in time of war ought not to be applied to us.

to\ me\n kaqestw\s toi=s *(/ellhsi no/mimon: cf. c. 56. 5 kata\ to\n pa=si no/mon kaqestw=ta. The form kaqestw/s, of the older editions, has been rightly restored by v. H., as also periestw/s, iv. 10. 3. For acc. to the testimony of the ancient grammarians the shorter Attic form was -estw/s (from -ao/s), not -esto/s. Hence the variation of the Mss. between -w/s and -o/s cannot be urged in favor of -o/s in the classical period. See O. Riemann, Bulletin de corr. hellén. iii. p. 440 ff., St. Qu. Gr.^{2} p. 64. Thucydides uses elsewhere the fuller form (i. 98. 9; iv. 97. 11; vii. 67. 10; viii. 66. 7, 12).—

no/mimon: custom, found only here in the sing., though common in the plur. (c. 58. 17; i. 71. 11; 77. 24, etc.).—3.

cummaxi/an th\n pri/n: this order, by which stress is thrown on the attribute, is common in Thuc. See on i. 1. 6. On the adv. with art. as adj., see Kühn. 461, 6.—4.

e)n h(donh=| e)/xousi: are pleased with, the periphrastic expression denoting enduring relation. Cf. e)n qerapei/a|, i. 55. 7; e)n o)rgh=|, ii. 21. 22; e)n o)rrwdi/a|, ii. 89. 3.—6.

xei/rous h(gou=ntai: consider them worse (sc. than they otherwise would), as in iv. 114. 13. For the omission of the second member of the comparison, see Kühn. 542, N. 7; Matth. 457; and cf. Lys. xxxii. 1. With the sentiment of the passage, cf. Liv. xxvii. 17 transfugae nomen exeerabile veteribus sociis, novis suspeetum. Also Tac. Ann. i. 58; Dem. xviii. 47.

kai\ ou)k . . . e)stin, ei) tu/xoien: the apod., vividly introduced by kai/ (and indeed), has the indic., while the prot., as if stating a purely hypothetical case (provided etc.), takes the opt. GMT. 501; Matth. 524, N. 3.—

au(/th h( a)ci/wsis: this estimate. h( do/ca, h( kri/sis, o( logismo/s, Schol. Cf. Plut. Per. 28 ou)k h)=n a)/dikos h( a)ci/wsis.—7. a)f) w(=n diakri/nointo: for rel. elause with omitted antee. standing for subst., see Kr. Spr. 51, 13, 5. For the opt. by assimilation, see GMT. 558; H. 919a. —8.

i)/soi me\n th=| gnw/mh| o)/ntes kai\ eu)noi/a|: i.e. having the same political views and being equally well-disposed toward each other. On Thuc.'s use of gnw/mh, see Introd. to Book I. p. 32. —

a)nti/paloi: i)sosqenei=s, i)/soi, Schol. In this sense common in Thuc. and Dio C., rare in other authors. (Bl.) Cf. Eur. I. T. 446 poina\s dou=s) a)ntipa/lous, Alc. 922 u(menai/wn go/os a)nti/palos.—9. pro/fasis: excuse. See on i. 23. 23.—

te: the ‘postseript te)’ introduces the third member, as in i. 2. 6 and freq.—

e)pieikh/s: reasonable, equitable. Cf. c. 4. 9. Bl. compares Dion. H. Antiq. 595, 28 e)pieikei=s ai)ti/as, Polyb. iii. 91. 7 e)pieikh= a)po/fasin.—10. o(/: refers to the three preceding clauses (i)/soime\n . . . a)posta/sews). See on i. 35. 15. Its influence extends to the following clause, mhde/ tw| . . . a)fista/meqa.—11. ei) . . . a)fista/meqa: the actual case is put in cond. form, as in c. 32. 6; 43. 19. mhde/ tw| xei/rous do/cwmen ei)=nai is about=mhde/ tis memfqh=| h(mi=n (cf. iv. 85. 7), and so ei) has the force of o(/ti. GMT. 494, 496; H. 926. —12.

timw/menoi: treated with honour, favoured, esp. in point of autonomy. Cf. c. 39. 9, 28; 56. 21.—

e)n toi=s deinoi=s: in the hour of danger. Cf. i. 70. 10; 84. 8, and see on ii. 87. 18.

For our alliance with Athens, which rested on the common defence against the Medes, long ago lost the necessary basis of confidence, seeing that the Athenians have reduced the allied cities one after another to subjection.

peri\ ga\r tou= dikai/ou kai\ a)reth=s: “concerning the justice of our cause and the honesty of our intentions.” peri\ tou= dikai/ws au)tw=n a)fi/stasqai, kai\ mh\ dia\ kaki/an te kai\ panourgi/an, Schol. ‘to\ di/kaion corresponds to pro/fasis e)pieikh/s above, a)reth=s refers to xei/rous.’ St. The force of the art. extends to a)reth=s. Kühn. 451, 1; 463, 2. The whole phrase includes everything that is demanded not only by the strict letter of the law, but also by considerations of equity and morality. (On a)reth/, magnanimity, fair or generous dealing, see Introd. to Book I. p. 36.) The reference is, however, not merely to the present revolt of the Mytileneans from the Athenians, but to their whole mutual relation, which is to be the basis of the judgment concerning the Mytileneans for the future. They base their request for admission to the Peloponnesian alliance on grounds, first, of worthiness, showing that for the best reasons and as soon as possible they had revolted from the Athenians (c. 10 to c. 13. § 2), second, of expediency and advantage to the Lacedaemonians (c. 13. § 3-6). The two main ideas are summed up c. 13. 14 i(/na fai/nhsqe . . . bla/ptontes. —2. ei)do/tes ou)/te . . . gi/gnointo kai\ ta)=lla o(moio/tropoi ei)=en: Cl. and Steup understand i)diw=tai kai\ po/leis as subj. of gi/gnointo, which is taken to mean, bear themselves (‘sich benehmen, verhalten’; see on i. 37. 12). The sense would then be: “Friendship between individuals and alliance between states cannot last, unless they bear themselves toward one another with a mutual recognition of honesty of purpose and are in other respects like in character.” But see App.— 4.

e)s ou)de/n: in any respect. Cf. vii. 59. 10; 87. 23.—

met) a)reth=s dokou/shs: =meta\ dokh/sews th=s a)reth=s, and dokou/shs signifies not appearance, but well grounded belief. ou) ga\r dh\ th\n prospoihth\n le/gei, Schol.—5.

o(moio/tropoi: nearly equiv. to i)/soi th=| gnw/mh|. Also i. 6. 24; vii. 55. 6; viii. 96. 27. The adv. occurs vi. 20. 12. Cf. Hdt. viii. 144. 16 h)/qea o(mo/tropa.—e)n ga\r tw=| dialla/ssonti th=s gnw/mhs . . . kaqi/stantai: for on divergence of sentiment rests diversity of action. Bl. cites an imitation of the passage in Procop. Bell. Vand. 145, 32 tw=| dialla/ssonti th=s gnw/mhs. dialla/ssein is intr., as in Hdt. vii. 70. 4. The use of neut. partic. or adj. for abstract noun is a favourite one with Thucydides. It presents to the mind the abstract quality in operation. GMT. 829 a; H. 966 b; Kühn. 403 a, g.

de/: now, effects the transition to the special case. Cf. i. 32. 7; 121. 1; ii. 64. 28.—

*)aqhnai/ois cummaxi/a e)ge/neto prw=ton: from what follows it is clear that the reference is to the beginning of the closer connexion of the Lesbians with Athens, i.e. the rise of the Delian confederation (i. 95). The orator represents Sparta's withdrawal from the Median war as preceding, not following, the formation of that alliance, in order not only to put the conduct of his state toward Sparta in a favourable light, but also to avoid touching the latter in a sensitive spot. Cf. i. 75. § 2, and see Steup, Rh. Mus. xxxv. p. 330 f.—8.

a)polipo/ntwn e)k: this rare const. occurs also v. 4. 11 a)polipo/ntes e)k tw=n *surakousw=n. Kühn. 447 c.; Matth. 495, 1.—9.

ta\ u(po/loipa: what yet remained, with tw=n e)/rgwn, as i. 75. 5, with tou= barba/rou.

cu/mmaxoi me/ntoi kte(.: we became allies, not to the Athenians for the enslavement of the Greeks, but to the Greeks for their emancipation from the Mede. The dats. *)aqhnai/ois (11) and toi=s *(/ellhsi (12) belong grammatieally to cu/mmaxoi e)geno/meqa, though the influence of the verbal nouns katadoulw/sei and e)leuqerw/sei on these dats., as in vi. 76. 20, is not excluded. This view, which is generally adopted, is supported by the const. in c. 13. 9, 10. But Kr. and Wilkins construe *)aqhnai/ois and toi=s *(/ellhsi as dativi commodi with the verbal nouns alone. By oi( *(/ellhnes are meant, both here and c. 13. 9 (cf. i. 130. 16; 140. 21), the states of the Delian confederation, whose treasurers were called *(ellhnotami/ai (i. 96. 6).—

katadoulw/sei: occurs also vii. 66. 6; Plato Legg. 776 d; elsewhere prob. only in late writers.—11.

e)leuqerw/sei: in this sense, c. 39. 39; Hdt. ix. 45. 18; freedom to slaves, i. 132. 22; Arist. Pol. v. 11. 19; license, Plato Rep. 561 a.—

a)po\ tou= *mh/dou: const. after the verbal noun as after the verb in i. 95. 3; ii. 71. 10; viii. 46. 21.

me/xri: while, as in c. 98. 1. Kühn. 567, 1.—

a)po\ tou= i)/sou: on terms of equality. kata\ th\n i)sonomi/an, Schol. On a)po/ in this sense, see Kühn. 430, 1, 3 h. See on i. 77. 8. —

h(gou=nto: abs., maintained their hegemony, as in i. 19. 2; 77. 23. Cf. e)chgei=sqai, i. 76. 3; 95. 26.— 14.

dou/lwsin: a Thucydidean noun, found also i. 141. 6; Plato Legg. 791 d. —15.

e)peigome/nous: urging on, Ross's and Bk.'s conjecture, for the vulgate e)pagome/nous, seems to be required to contrast with a)nie/ntas, and has been adopted by St. and Cl. Cf. Va. tendentes ad. It is trans. also in c. 2. 14; iv. 5. 9; vi. 100. 5; viii. 9. 2; 82. 9. See App.

a)du/natoi de\ o)/ntes . . . a)mu/nesqai: and disabled by diversity of opinion from combining and defending themselves. Although in the development of the thought the subj. is divided into cu/mmaxoi plh\n h(mw=n kai\ *xi/wn and h(mei=s, the undivided subj. is to be understood with a)du/natoi o)/ntes at the beginning. dia\ poluyhfi/an belongs to a)du/natoi o)/ntes, kaq) e(\n geno/menoi to a)mu/nesqai. poluyhfi/a is diversity of opinion naturally arising from the fact that so many had the right to vote. The disadvantages of the i)soyhfi/a of the Peloponnesian alliance, which resulted in poluyhfi/a, are set forth in i. 141. § 6, 7. The word is not found elsewhere.

dh/: scilicet, intimates what is expressed in tw=| o)no/mati. The ironical force occurs as early as Homer (A 110). Cf. iv. 46. 18, 20; 67. 17; vi. 10. 23; 54. 18; and dh=qen, i. 92. 3; 127. 2. Kr. Spr. 69, 17, 2; Kühn. 500, 3.—19.

pistou/s: to be trusted. Cf. c. 92. 7.—

paradei/gmasi toi=s progegenhme/nois xrw/menoi: since the paradei/gmata must have been facts already accomplished, Weidner's conjecture of the pf. for the pres. (progegenhme/nois for progignome/nois) is necessary here, as well as in i. 23. 25. See Parerga Dinarch. et Thuc., 1875, p. 22. Cf. Procop. B. V. i. 10 paradei/gmasi de\ tw=n progegenhme/nwn xrwme/nous—20. ou) ga\r kte(.: for it was not likely that they after subduing those whom they had made sharers in the treaty with us would not have done the same to us who were left, if ever they had been able. So Bm. correctly explains. dra=sai, as well as katastre/yasqai, refers to the past; hence Dobree's conjecture dunhqei=en, Kr.'s dunhqei/hsan, are unnecessary. The arrangement is paratactic, though the first clause is in sense subord., as in i. 28. 15; 35. 4. On this form of apod. in unreal cond. (ou) ga\r ei)ko\s h)=n au)tou\s mh\ dra=sai tou=to), see GMT. 420, 421; Kr. Spr. 53, 2, 7; Kühn. 392 b, 4. Cf. c. 40. 26; 74. 11; vi. 78. 22.

And that our autonomy has hitherto been spared by their lust for power we owe alone to a regard for their own interests, which would, however, not have protected us much longer.

kai\ ei) me\n . . . a)\n e)pelqei=n a)potre/petai: the second ground of the untenableness of the federal relation: the growing strength of the Atheni ans and the increasing isolation of the Mytileneans.—

bebaio/teroi: pers. const., like di/kaios in i. 40. 13. GMT. 762; H. 944; Kühn. 477 d.—2.

newteriei=n: used to express any innovation in established order, esp. harsh and violent changes. Cf. Lat. res novae. Cf. c. 4. 15; i. 58. 3; ii. 3. 6; iv. 51. 3.— 3.

a)po\ tou= i)/sou: see on c. 10. 12.— 4.

e)/mellon oi)/sein: Thuc. uses the fut. inf. with me/llein far oftener than the present. See on i. 107. 13. The obj. of oi)/sein is to be supplied from h(mi=n . . . o(milou=ntes.—kai\ pro\s . . . a)ntisoume/nou: these words, which are closely connected, give the explanation of xalepw/teron e)/mellon oi)/sein. While u(poxeiri/ous . . . o(milou=ntes states the actual relation from the side of the Athenians, what follows expresses this from the side of the Mytileneans, but from the standpoint of the Athenians. Render: “because our state alone, even though the majority had already yielded, still maintained its equality.” See App. kai/, which belongs esp. to pro\s to\ plei\on h)/dh ei(=kon, emphasizes the andacity of the Lesbians in the eyes of the Athenians. pro/s, as against, as in i. 6. 15; ii. 91. 18. tou= h(mete/rou is neuter. a)ntiso/omai is not found elsewhere except in late writers. See Steph. Thes. s.v.—6.

dunatw/teroi au)toi\ au(tw=n: more powerful than they were before. The comp. with gen. of reflex. pron. measures progress by change in the subj. itself. Cf. i. 8. 13; vi. 72. 22; vii. 66. 14. The const. is freq. in Hdt. H. 644; Kühn. 543, 6.—7.

to\ de\ a)nti/palon de/os mo/non pisto\n e)s cummaxi/an: this clause, containing the second ground of the untenableness of the alliance, is closely connected with the preceding (de/=ga/r), “for fear based on equal power is alone to be relied on in the case of an alliance.” Cf. iv. 92. 14 pro/s te ga\r tou\s a)stugei/tonas pa=si to\ a)nti/palon kai\ e)leu/qeron kaqi/statai, Tac. Germ. 1 Germania a Sarmatis Dacisque mutuo metu separatur. But Steup gives strong reasons for bracketing de/os. See App.—8.

tw=| mh\ . . . a)potre/petai: the chief stress is on proe/xwn, “is deterred only by the consideration that he would make the attack not with superior force,” i.e. not with prospect of success.

te: introducing third reason (see on c. 9. 10), which covers the remainder of the chapter; viz. that only regard for appearances and for present advantage kept the Athenians from being more aggressive.—10.

o(/son: quatenus, equiv. to kaq) o(/son, c. 9. 4; vi. 54. 25; 82. 11. o(/son instead of o(/ti, in order to restrict the motive to the narrowest limits, to concede as little as possible to good intentions.—

e)s th\n a)rxh\n . . . katalhpta/: “it was clear to them that to extend their dominion they could get control of affairs by fair words and by an assault of policy rather than by force.” The main object of the Athenians, e)s th\n a)rxh/n, ad imperium quaerendum, is emphasized by its position, separated as it is from ta\ pra/gmata e)fai/neto katalhpta/ (cf. c. 30. 11), of which it expresses the motive. But see App. eu)prepei/a| lo/gou is explained by the following a(/ma me\n . . . custrateu/ein, and gnw/mhs ma=llon e)fo/dw| h)\ i)sxu/os first and esp. by e)n tw=| au)tw=| de\ . . . e)xeirw/santo, to which then two further reasons are added (19 and 21).—11.

ta\ pra/gmata . . . katalhpta/: here of securing predominance (cf. Hdt. vi. 39. 4); c. 30. 11, of conquering in battle. Cf. iv. 2. 13 katasxh/sein r(a|di/ws ta\ pra/gmata, c. 62. 11; 72. 3 e)/xein ta\ pra/gmata, c. 28. 1 oi( e)n toi=s pra/gmasi, i. 89. 2 h)=lqon e)pi\ ta\ pra/gmata, vii. 49. 3 to\ boulo/menon toi=s *)aqhnai/ois gi/gnesqai ta\ pra/gmata.

a(/ma me/n: the correlative is e)n tw=| au)tw=| de/ (14), as in iv. 73. 10.—

marturi/w| e)xrw=nto mh\ a)\n . . . custrateu/ein: the inf. clause is the obj. of e)xrw=nto, “they used as a proof (of the propriety of their course) that those at least who had equal votes with them would be unwilling to join in their expeditions, unless those whom they went against were guilty of some wrong.” The condensed statement is about equiv. to a(/ma me\n ga\r marturi/w| e)xrw=nto, mh\ a)\n toi/s ge i)soyh/fous, ei) mh/ ti h)di/koun oi)=s e)ph/|esan, custrateu/ein, ou) ga\r a)\n a)/konta/s ge custrateu/ein, i)soyh/fous o)/ntas. (Goeller.) See App.—13.

i)soyh/fous: ‘It seems to be rhetorical exaggeration that the Lesbians, au)to/nomoi and (though after the revolt only the Methymneans) nausi\ kai\ ou) fo/rw| u(ph/kooi (vii. 57. 22), call themselves i)soyh/fous, mindful to be sure of the right and of the ancient statute, long ago abolished by the Athenians, acc. to which the allies consulted a)po\ koinw=n cuno/dwn. Cf. i. 97. § 1.’ St.—14.

e)n tw=| au)tw=| de/: on the position of de/, to emphasize tw=| au)tw=|, see Kühn. 528, 1.—

kai\ ta\ kra/tista: kai\ tou\s krati/stous h(ma=s, Schol. The neut. pl. of the adj. expresses a concrete idea. Kühn. 403, N. 2.—15.

ta\ teleutai=a: as the last, pred. to ta\ kra/tista, as the position of te, kai/ shows. The art., which Kr., St., and Steup strike out, L. Herbst (Philol., 1860, p. 342 f.) explains as intended to sharpen the contrast with what precedes, ‘as the last in the series, as it were the capstone of their work.’ Cf. c. 85. 2; possibly c. 23. 15.—16.

tou= a)/llou perih|rhme/nou: “when all else was stripped from around them,” like a tree lopped of its branches. Cf. ii. 13. 38; Plato Gorg. 502 c; Dem. xxi. 138. tou= a)/llou collective, as in c. 107. 25; i. 48. 6; iv. 96. 8; viii. 42. 7.

a)sqene/stera e(/cein: a favourite turn of Thuc., often used in expressions of change. See on i. 120. 9.—18.

au)tw=n: themselves, intens., not possessive.—

pro\s o(/ ti xrh\ sth=nai: something to rally to. Cf. iv. 56. 17 pro\s th\n e)kei/nwn gnw/mhn ai)ei\ e(/stasan. The usual form is meta/ tinos sth=nai, as in c. 39. 12; i. 33. 22; vii. 57. 4; 61. 12. xrh/ with inf. is a common periphrasis for the delib. subj. in dependent clauses. Cf. c. 53. 9; i. 40. 20; 91. 4; ii. 4. 10; iv. 34. 25; vii. 44. 15. Kr. Spr. 54, 7, 2; Kühn. 394, N. 3.—

ou)k a)\n o(moi/ws: sc. as they did with the course adopted. Cf. i. 2. 22; ii. 60. 21.

to/ te nautiko\n kte(.: third cause of the e)/fodos gnw/mhs ma=llon h)\ i)sxu/os, namely, that the Mytileneans might not become prematurely frightened and make an alliance dangerous to Athens.—20.

mh/ pote kaq) e(\n geno/menon . . . parasxh=|: lest perchance a union might be effected, either by joining you or some one else, which would bring danger to themselves. kaq) e(\n geno/menon, as in c. 10. 16. prosqe/menon, as in viii. 48. 29; 87. 25. Steup, who claims that, as the passage stands, kaq) e(\n geno/menon can only be subord, to prosqe/menon, is inclined to bracket prosqe/menon, and explain kaq) e(\n . . . a)/llw| tw| after the analogy of di) a)nokwlh=s gi/gnesqai/ tini, i. 40. 16.

ta\ de\ kai/: partly also, similar to to\ de/ ti kai/ of i. 107. 19; 118. 12; vii. 48. 7. Kr. Spr. 50, 1, 15; Kühn. 459, 1 c. This introduces the last reason, though only as a subord. one, why the Lesbians were not deprived of their liberty.—

a)po\ qerapei/as: in consequence of our paying court. a)po/, as in i. 12. 5; 17. 4; 23. 27; 24. 10. Müller-Strübing (Aristoph. u. d. hist. Kritik, p. 366 ff.) rightly sees here, with the Schol., an allusion to bribery of Athenian statesmen, more clearly stated in Ar. Vesp. 675 ff.—22.

periegigno/meqa: i.e. au)to/nomoi e)lei/fqhmen (9).

a)\n e)dokou=men dunhqh=nai: sc. perigi/gnesqai. Kr. Spr. 55, 4, 11. e)dokou=men, we thought, as in i. 126. 20; 128. 30; iv. 14. 14; vii. 41. 14. a)/n belongs to dunhqh=nai. Kr. writes dokou=men on the ground that only with the pres. can dunhqh=nai a)/n stand for e)dunh/qhmen a)/n. But Steup cites viii. 2. 3 e)phrme/noi h)=san . . . nomi/santes ka)\n e)pi\ sfa=s e(/kastoi e)lqei=n au)tou/s, ei) ta\ e)n th=| *sikeli/a| katw/rqwsan. For Steup's objections to the impf., see App.—24.

toi=s e)s tou\s a)/llous: their conduct toward the rest. Schol. tekmh/ria h)=n h(mi=n ta\ pro\s tou\s a)/llous u(p) *)aqhnai/wn geno/mena.

The question was simply, which should anticipate hostile action on the part of the other. Considering the circumstances, we have done no wrong in revolting before the Athenians attacked us.

ti/s ou)=n au(/th . . . pisth/: “was this then a friendship or a freedom on which one could rely?” For the position of the subj. au(/th after the interr. (G. 1602; H. 1012 a), after the analogy of consts. with the sup., see on i. 1. 8. e)gi/gneto, not h)=n, to indicate the growing mistrust. pisth/ belongs to fili/a as well as e)leuqeri/a. Dindorf's conjecture h)\ fili/a for vulg. h( fili/a has the support of the Cod. Clarend., and has been generally adopted. Bl., however, thinks the vulg. makes good sense, ‘supposing that the words fili/a and e)leuqeri/a, though written once, are to be taken twice, thus: “What sort of friendship, then, was this friendship of ours? What assured or secure liberty was this liberty of ours?”’— 2.

e)n h(=| . . . e)/mellon: description of the form their relation to Athens had at last taken.—

para\ gnw/mhn a)llh/lous u(pedexo/meqa: we received one another contrary to our real feelings. para\ gnw/mhn, praeter animi sententiam, not in the usual sense of conviction or expectation (c. 42. 29; 60. 4; iv. 40. 1; v. 14. 12; vi. 9. 12). u(pode/xesqai has been from the earliest period of the language the regular expression for every kindly, esp. hospitable, reception. Cf. Hom. *z 136, c 52, p 70; Pind. Pyth. ix. 9; Hdt. i. 41. 5; Ar. Acharn. 979; Xen. Mem. iii. 11. 10; Plato Legg. 952 e. From that is derived the more general signification of friendly courtesies, esp. between strangers. St. rightly observes that u(pode/xesqai, which in Plato Legg. 952 e is connected with a)gorai=s kai\ lime/si, is the opp. of lime/nwn kai\ a)gora=s ei)/rgesqai (yh/fisma peri\ *megare/wn, i. 67. 14), and therefore about=e)pimei/gnusqai par) a)llh/lous (ii. 1. 3). Cf. Liv. xxx. 14 benigno vultu excepisset. Plato Meno 91 a similarly connects u(pode/xesqai and qerapeu/ein.— 3. e)qera/peuon: cf. c. 11. 22.—

h(mei=s de\ . . . e)poiou=men: not contradictory to c. 9. § 2 e)n th=| ei)rh/nh| . . . a)fista/meqa, for there the reference is only to the outward position of the Mytileneans, which continued to be an honourable one, even though they had assiduously to court the favour of the Athenians.—4.

o(/ te toi=s a)/llois . . . e)xuro\n parei=xe: Cl., St., and Steup strike out pi/stin. If the traditional reading be retained, Kr.'s explanation seems best: ‘The sent., if complete, would read o(/ te toi=s a)/llois ma/lista eu)/noia poiei= (or pare/xei), pi/stin bebaioi=, kte(.’ See App.—6.

katexo/menoi: overmastered, constrained, as in c. 45. 18. Cf. Eur. Hipp. 27 kardi/an kate/sxeto e)/rwti deinw=|. In Arr. Anab. ii. 17. 2 th=s de\ *)aqhnai/wn po/lews fo/bw| ma=llo/n ti h)\ eu)noi/a| th=| pro\s h(ma=s pro\s to\ paro\n katexome/nhs, which is an evident imitation of the present passage, the meaning is restrained. Cf. c. 107. 9.—8.

ou(=toi pro/teroi/ ti kai\ . . . e)/mellon: these were sure to be the first also to transgress. kai/ introduces the immediate accomplishment of the anticipation of the prot., as in ii. 93. 18; viii. 1. 31. With pro/teroi/ ti parabh/sesqai, cf. c. 11. 8; also c. 54. 11 th\n ei)rh/nhn ou) lu/santes pro/teroi, i. 123. 11 sponda\s ou) lu/sete pro/teroi, vii. 18. 10 ta\s sponda\s prote/rous leluke/nai.

w(/ste ei)/ tw| . . . deinw=n: so that if, on account of their postponement of the evils intended for us, we seem to anyone to do wrong in revolting beforehand. me/llhsis seems not to occur elsewhere in trans. significa tion. tw=n deinw=n, violent measures, as in ii. 77. 3; iv. 98. 1. For the position of me/llhsin between the subj. and obj. gen., see on i. 25. 21.—10.

au)toi\ ou)k a)ntanamei/nantes: without ourselves having waited in turn. a)ntaname/nein, which seems to be found only here, takes a limiting inf., as a)name/nein, iv. 120. 19; 135. 8. Cf. also e)pime/nein, c. 2. 7; 26. 13; perime/nein, vii. 20. 16. —11.

au)tw=n: sc. tw=n deinw=n.

ei) ga\r dunatoi\ . . . i)e/nai: so Cl. reads, putting, with Heilmann, a)ntepibouleu=sai, kai\ a)ntimellh=sai/ ti e)/dei h(ma=s for a)ntepibouleu=sai kai\ a)ntimellh=sai, ti/ e)/dei h(ma=s, and, with Kr., e)p) e)kei/nous i)e/nai for e)p) e)kei/nois ei)=nai, “were we able equally with them to counterplot, so ought we then also in like manner to have delayed to proceed against them.” The proleptic kai/ inserted in the prot., as often in rel. clauses, and repeated in the apodosis. See on i. 83. 7. a)ntimellh=sai (so Bk., with the Schol. and T; most Mss. a)ntepimellh=sai) is chosen with reference to the boasted me/llhsis of the Athenians. Cf. a)ntanamei/nantes above. The sense of the vulg., which all the English commentators retain, is probably: “if we were able on equal terms with them to counterplot and counter-delay, what need was there for us, being on equal terms, to be at their beck and call?” Cf. Schol. ei) ga\r i)/soi au)toi=s u(ph/rxomen . . . ti/ e)/dei h(ma=s e)p) e)kei/nois taxqh=nai h)\ u(pakoi/ein au)toi=s. See App.—14.

e)p) e)kei/nois: in their power. Cf. ii. 84. 11; iv. 29. 18.

Intending to revolt even before the present war, we were hindered by you. Now, invited by the Boeotians, we have promptly taken this step not only in our own interest, but in that of the Hellenes who are enslaved by the Athenians. But as our revolt has been made too hastily and without the necessary preparations, you are the more bound to assist us, in order that your readiness to help in such cases may be known. All the circumstances are favourable. The power of the Athenians, already weakened and divided, will lose by our defection one of its strongest supports, while your fleet will receive a considerable addition.

toiau/tas e)/xontes: in close connexion with the preceding without connecting particle, as in ii. 74. 1; iv. 93. 1, and freq.—

profa/seis, ai)ti/as: not essentially different, except that the former is more the immediate occasion for action, as in i. 23. 23; 118. 3; Dem. xviii. 156. See on c. 9. 10.—2.

safei=s gnw=nai, i(kana\s e)kfobh=sai: for inf. limiting adj., see GMT. 758; H. 952. Cf. i. 50. 25; ii. 61. 12; vii. 14. 6.—4.

pro\s a)sfa/leia/n tina tre/yai: to cause us to turn to some means of safety, i.e. to an alliance with Sparta. Cf. vi. 59. 7.—

boulome/nous me/n, kwluqe/ntas de/: sc. a)fi/stasqai. The partics., though joined to a subord. clause, by their position at the end of the period come to have the force of the leading clause, so that the following nu=n de\ kte(. refers only to them. Cf. c. 2. § 1.—5.

e)/ti e)n th=| ei)rh/nh|: closely connected, as in ii. 2. 19. See on i. 30. 20. 6.

u(mw=n de\ ou) prosdecame/nwn: cf. c. 2. 3.— 7.

*boiwtoi\ proukale/santo: this influence is not definitely mentioned above. But cf. c. 2. 14; 5. 13.—8.

e)nomi/zomen a)posth/sesqai diplh=n a)po/stasin . . . propoih=sai: we thought to effect a twofold withdrawal: from the Hellenes, so as not to become partners with the Athenians in doing them harm, but to aid in frecing them, and from the Athenians, so as not to be destroyed ourselves by them afterwards, but rather to destroy them first (propoih=sai, i.e. prodiafqei=rai). For examples similar to a)fi/stasqai a)po/stasin, see Lobeck, Paralip. ii. 516 f. See also on i. 37. 11. e)nomi/zomen here, as freq., expresses a certain self-confidence. Cf. i. 84. 17; 105. 23; ii. 3. 7. As to te, te, for which kai/, kai/ is more usual in prose, see on i. S. 14; ii. 84. 14. In the const. of the sent. Thuc. evidently had in mind c. 10. § 3. Nominally the Mytileneans revolted not only from the Athenians, but also from the rest of the Hellenes of the Delian alliance, for whose enslavement they had, as they alleged, been obliged to aid the Athenians. But most editt. hold that a)po/stasis is used here in a double sense, first, as regards the Greeks, of absistendi (cf. iv. 118. 40; vii. 7. 9), second, as regards the Athenians, of revolt. The object of the entrance into the alliance is expressed in c. 10. § 3 by e)pi/ with the dat., while here the object of its renunciation is expressed by infs., the pres. (cu\n kakw=s poiei=n, cuneleuqerou=n) in reference to the unlimited future, the aor. (diafqarh=nai, propoih=sai) to the case in hand.—9.

cu\n kakw=s poiei=n: like a)nt) eu(= poiei=n, Ar. Plut. 1029; Xen. Anab. v. 5.21; Plato Gorg. 520 e; Dem. xx. 64. 124, 141; su\n eu)= pa/sxein, Dem. viii. 65. Cf. Soph. Ant. 523 ou)/toi sune/xqein, a)lla\ sumfilei=n e)/fun. For cu/n as adv., see Matth. 594, 2.

qa=sson: sc. h)\ h)boulo/meqa. For the omission of the second member of the comparison, see Kühn. 542, N. 7. The adv. co-ord. with adj., as in c. 4. 4. As to the facts, cf. c. 2. § 1, 2; 4. § 2.—13.

h(=| kai/: used before a comp. adv. emphasizes an inference. Cf. i. 11. 8; 25. 22; ii. 2. 21; iv. 1. 14.—

cumma/xous . . . a)poste/llein: see App. cumma/xous is pred. to decame/nous h(ma=s, as i. 43. 7.—

dia\ taxe/wn:=taxe/ws, as in i. 80. 8; iv. 8. 18; 96. 4; vi. 66. 10; viii. 101. 4. —14.

i(/na fai/nhsqe a)mu/nonte/s te kte(.: summary of the two chief points on which the Mytileneans base their request. See on c. 10. 1. The grounds for the last clause (tou\s polemi/ous bla/ptontes) are given in what follows.

w(s ou)/pw pro/teron: cf. ii. 20. 5; v. 63. 4.—

e)fqa/ratai, teta/xatai: such Ion. forms of the pf. and plpf. occur also in iv. 31. 7; v. 6. 23; vii. 4. 34. G. 701; 777, 3; H. 464 a; Kühn.^{3} 214, 8; Kr. Spr. 30, 2, 7.—17.

xrhma/twn dapa/nh|: ‘a plena locutio, which has, however, an intensive force.’ Bl. It occurs also in [Dem.] lx. 13. —

nh=es, ai( me/n, ai( de/: part. appos. See on ii. 95. 5; vii. 71. 4. G. 914; H. 624 d; Kühn. 406, 7.—18.

ai( me\n . . . ei)si/n: i.e. the 30 ships sent under Asopius. Cf. c. 7. 3. peri\ th\n u(mete/ran=peri\ th\n *lakwnikh/n, as often in this specch the Lacedaemonians only are to be understood as addressed (e.g. ll. 6, 34). The territory of the Peloponnesian alliance was not such a unity that the orators could properly speak of a fleet as about this territory. See also on c. 16. 4, 12.—

e)f) h(mi=n: in hostile sense, rare instead of the accusative. Cf. c. 16. 4; 63. 8; i. 102. 19; ii. 70. 8.

ou)k ei)ko\s au)tou\s periousi/an new=n e)/xein: considering the statement above, 1. 16, no/sw| . . . dapa/nh|, and that there could hardly have been a prospect of an actual lack of ships (cf. ii. 13. 55), the reference seems to be to the manning and maintenance of more ships. The inf. pres. with ei)ko/s on account of the notion of duration. Cf. iv. 20. 16, and see on i. 81. 13.—20.

e)pesba/lhte to\ deu/teron: e)pi- is further defined by to\ deu/teron. e)peisbalei=n, meaning attack, is found clsewhere only in a fragment of Palaephatus; in Eur. El. 498 it means insuper inicere. The first invasion was described in c. 1.— 21.

a)p) a)mfote/rwn: sc. h(mw=n te kai\ u(mw=n.

nomi/sh| te mhdei/s: order as in iv. 95. 3; vi. 84. 1. Kühn. 512, N. 1. —

a)llotri/as . . . e(/cein: cf. i. 78. 2.— 23.

makra\n a)pei=nai: procul abesse. Cf. makra\n a)poikei=n, c. 55. 5. Kr. Spr. 43, 3, 8.—24.

th\n w)feli/an au)tw=|: when an oblique ease of au)to/s thus follows its rel., it is equiv. to a weak dem. and cannot stand first in its clause. Kühn. 468, N. 4. Cf. iv. 92. 42; 126. 19; 128. 3.—

ou) ga\r e)n th=| *)attikh=| e)/stai o( po/lemos: for not upon Attica will the war depend, i.e. it will not draw its strength thence. For e)n, not in local sense, cf. i. 74. 2 e)n tai=s nausi\ ta\ pra/gmata e)ge/neto, ii. 35. 7 e)n e(ni\ a)ndri\ . . . kinduneu/esqai, ii. 64. 11 mh\ e)n u(mi=n kwluqh=|. Kr. Spr. 68, 12, 6.—25.

di) h(/n: i.e. e)n tau/th| di) h(/n, nearly=di) h(=s. Cf. i. 83. 4 dapa/nhs, di) h(\n ta\ o(/pla w)felei=. Also c. 39. 43; vii. 68. 18; Dem. i. 12.

e)/sti de\ . . . h( pro/sodos: cf. ii. 13. 20 le/gwn th\n i)sxu\n au)toi=s a)po\ toi/twn ei)=nai tw=n xrhma/twn th=s proso/dou.— 27. kai\ e)/ti . . . katastre/yontai: the proof of the claim made 1. 24. th\n w)feli/an . . . pare/cei. If the subjugation of the Mytileneans will increase the revenues of the Athenians, it is clearly to the interest of the Peloponnesians to prevent this.—28.

ta/ te h(me/tera: nostrae opes. te correl. to ou)/te.—29. pa/qoime/n t) a)\n deino/tera: esp. through an increase of taxes, as it would seem from the context. te introduces a third circumstance. For the opt. with a)/n exchanging with fut. indie., see Kühn. 396, N. 1.—

h)\ oi( pri\n douleu/ontes: than those enslaved before (us), i.e. the cu/mmaxoi u(potelei=s (i. 80. 14; 99. 11). Cf. c. 10. § 4. 5. Arnold explains: ‘Worse than they who were slares before they rerolled; because the Mytileneans would seem to have revolted on much less provocation. See Cleon's speech c. 39. § 5, where he calls for an exemplary vengeance upon Mytilene on this very ground.’

bohqhsa/ntwn de\ u(mw=n: this alternative, which contains the main point of the thought, or rather of the whole speech, is expressed in gen. abs., although the verbs of the apod. have the same subject. GMT. 850; Kr. Spr. 47, 4, 2; Kühn. 494 a. See on c. 112. 21; ii. 83. 15; viii. 76. 12.— 32.

prosdei=: sc. besides what you already have.—

kaqairh/sete: of violent overthrow of an existing order of things, or a predominant person. See on i. 4. 6; 77. 20.—

u(fairou=ntes: of gradual drawing out. Cf. c. 31. 8; 82. 17. Bl. calls this an architectural metaphor, namely to pull down (kaqairei=n) by undermining or pulling out stones from the foundation (u(fairei=n).—33.

pa=s tis: everyone, as comprehensive as possible. Kr. Spr. 51, 16, 11. Cf. c. 93. 10; ii. 41. 21; vi. 68. 7; vii. 60. 13. —34.

th\n ai)ti/an: the reproach, as in ii. 18. 9; 60. 25; vi. 60. 3. With e)/xein also i. 83. 8; vi. 46. 27.—

a)pofeu/cesqe: cf. ii. 42. 23 to\ ai)sxro\n tou= lo/gou e)/fugon.—h(\n ei)/xete: refers to the period before the Peloponnesian war. Cf. i. 69. § 5. The reading of Vat., e)/xete—with which a)pofeu/cesqe would mean get rid of, not avoid—would ill accord with the relation of the Mytileneans to the Lacedaemonians, and would hardly answer to the actual circumstances, since the Lacedaemonians had indeed, as they had promised and not far otherwise than the Mytileneans now demanded for themselves (c. 13. § 4; 15. § 1), sought to bring aid to the Potidaeans (cf. i. 58. § 1; 71. § 4; ii. 70. § 1, and, as an example of the opposite course in earlier times, i. 101. § 1 f.).—35.

h)\n d' e)leuqerou=ntes fai/nhsqe: if you openly appear as liberators (of the oppressed). Thus fanh=te, which would be the more usual form before e(/cete, is not necessary. There is an allusion to the boast made by the Lacedaemonians at the opening of the war, o(/ti th\n *(ella/da e)leuqerou=sin (ii. 8. 15; iv. 85. 4). Cf. c. 32. 5.—

to\ kra/tos tou= pole/mou: to\ du/nasqai perigene/sqai tw=| pole/mw|, Schol. Cf. ii. 87. 27; Plato Legg. 962 a. Also Dem. xix. 130 kra/tos pole/mou kai\ ni/khn . . . dido/nai, Dio C. (fragm.) 35. 4 to\ kra/tos tou= pole/mou u(poxei/rion e)/sxe. kra/tos in this sense (mastery, victory) seems to be Ion. and poetic.—

bebaio/teron e(/cete: see on c. 11. 16.

Honour and advantage, therefore, alike bid you to assist us.

e)s u(ma=s: free use of the prep., as in i. 41. 8. Kühn. 432, 1, 3 a. Cf. Dio C. li. 13 metagignw/skein e)pla/sato, w(s kai\ e)lpi/da pollh\n me\n e)s e)kei=non, pollh\n de\ kai\ e)s th\n *lioui+/an e)/xousa. —2.

*di/a to\n *)olu/mpion: an exception to the rule that the art. stands with both the name and appellation of a god, or is omitted with both. Kr. Spr. 50, 7, 10.—

e)n ou(= tw=| i(erw=|: this position of the gen. between the prep. and its noun is esp. common in Thuc., and is the usual one with ou(=. Cf. c. 70. 16; 81. 26; 96. 1; v. 47. 66. Kr. Spr. 47, 9, 19.—

i)/sa kai/: H. 1042 a; Kühn. 423, N. 18. Cf. e)n i)/sw| kai/, ii. 60. 20; e)n tw=| o(moi/w| kai/, vi. 11. 15; paraplhsi/ais kai/, v. 112. 3; vii. 70. 2; o(moi/ws kai/, vii. 28. 30; viii. 76. 13; Hdt. viii. 60. 25; w(sau/tws kai/, Hdt. vii. 86. 7; o(/tw| ge nou=s i)/sos kai\ soi\ pa/ra, Soph. O. C. 810; sebi/zw s) i)/sa kai\ ma/karas, Eur. El. 994. i)/sa is adv., as o(moi=a, i. 25. 18. i)/sa kai/ occurs also in late writers, e.g. Aristid. Panath. i. p. 285 i)/sa kai\ a)h/tthtos.—4. i)/dion . . . koinh\n . . . koinote/ran: “we alone make the sacrifice; the results, whether good or bad (the latter in still greater measure, koinote/ran), will fall upon all.”—

i)/dion me\n . . . paraballome/nous: unusual for met) i)di/ou kindu/nou ta\ sw/mata paraballome/nous. sw/mata means life and limb, as in i. 70. 19; 141. 18; ii. 42. 24. paraba/llesqai, to risk (as at play), also c. 65. 12; ii. 44. 16; Hdt. vii. 10. q 3; Hom. i 322. But here the obj. is the danger instead of the thing endangered.—5.

katorqw=sai, sfalhso/meqa: usual antithesis, as in c. 39. 39; ii. 65. 28.—7.

mh/: belongs to the partic. only. Cf. i. 32. 24; 37. 6.—8.

oi( *(/ellhnes a)ciou=si: cf. i. 69. 7. Supply ei)=nai with a)ciou=si and bou/letai.

The Mytileneans are received into the Peloponnesian alliance and the Lacedaemonians prepare to invade Attica.

th\n e)s th\n *)attikh\n e)sbolh/n: cf. c. 13. § 4. The acc. placed first, though grammatically dependent on w(s poihso/menoi, is almost abs., and as to the invasion of Attica. Cf. ii. 62. 1; Soph. El. 1364. See on i. 32. 17. —

parou=si kata\ ta/xos . . . me/resin: parou=si is to be connected with i)e/nai and is dependent on e)/frazon (=e)ke/leuon), gave orders to present themselves speedily and march to the isthmus with a contingent of two thirds. So Lupus explains, N. Jahrbb. cxi. p. 166. Steup brackets parou=si. See App.—5.

e)/frazon: with dependent inf., also vi. 58. 7. Kühn. 473, 2. The impf. does not differ here essentially from the aorist. GMT. 57; Kr. Spr. 53, 2, 1. The original subj. oi( *lakedaimo/nioi kai\ oi( cu/mmaxoi is here limited to oi( *lakedaimo/nioi alone. See on c. 10. 16; i. 18. 21.—

toi=s du/o me/resi: i.e. with two thirds of their whole force capable of bearing arms. This was the regular contingent furnished by the Peloponnesian states for expeditions beyond their own borders. Cf. ii. 10. 6; 47. 2.—6.

o(/lkous: o)/rgana oi(=s ai( nh=es e(/lkontai, Schol.—7.

w(s u(peroi/sontes: sc. ta\s nau=s. Cf. c. 81. 3; iv. 8. 8; viii. 7. 7; Dio C. lxviii. 28 u(perenegkw\n ta\ ploi=a o(/lkois, Liv. xlii. 16 per Isthmi iugum navibus traductis Aeginam traiciunt. See Wachsmuth, Ant. Gr. ii. p. 336. Acc. to Strabo viii. 6. 22, the place where the transfer was made was called di/olkos.—9. e)pio/ntes: as fut. partic. co-ord. with u(peroi/sontes and dependent on w(s.

oi( a)/lloi cu/mmaxoi: since just above (ll. 4, 6) toi=s cumma/xois and au)toi/ are opposed, a)/lloi means here doubtless besides. See on i. 2. 12. G. 966, 2; H. 705.—11.

karpou=: collective sing., like Eng. fruit, as in iv. 84. 5; 88. 4; Hom. A 156. Cf. ka/lamos, ii. 76. 2; a)/mpelos, iv. 90. 9; multa fruge, Hor. Ep. i. 16. 10. Kr. Spr. 44, 1, 1; Kühn. 347, 1. The art. is omitted on acc. of the close connexion with cugkomidh=|. Since the summer was already advanced (see on date of the Olympia, c. 8. 5), karpo/s prob. refers here, as in iv. 84. 5, esp. to grapes. See A. Mommsen, Über d. Zeit der Olympien, p. 57 ff.—

e)n . . . h)=san: belongs to both the essentially different expressions, cugkomidh=| (of action) and a)rrwsti/a| (of disposition of mind); with the former after the analogy of e)n paraskeuh=| ei)=nai, ii. 101. 10; with the latter after that of e)n taraxh=| kai\ fo/bw| ei)=nai, c. 79. 9.—

a)rrwsti/a|: i.e. a)proqumi/a|, despondency, as in vii. 47. 3. Cf. viii. 83. 7 a)rrwsto/teron.

But seeing the counter preparations made by the Athenians they give up this plan and fit out a fleet for the protection of Lesbos.

dia\ kata/gnwsin a)sqenei/as sfw=n: because they imputed weakness to them. kata/gnwsis of unfavourable judgment, as katagignw/skein (c. 45. 4; vi. 34. 51; vii. 51. 3; Hdt. vi. 97. 7, and freq.)<*>katafronei=n (viii. 8. 19 katafronh/santes tw=n *)aqhnai/wn a)dunami/an). sfw=n, too, stands under the influence of kata-, as in c. 45. 4. The Lacedaemonians had adopted the view of Athenian affairs expressed by the Mytileneans c. 13. § 3, 4.— 3.

mh\ kinou=ntes to\ e)pi\ *le/sbw| nautiko/n: see on c. 13. 18. That here, in spite of the evident reference to c. 13. § 3, 4, Thuc. does not include under mh\ kinou=ntes also the fleet sent around Peloponnesus, is to be explained on the ground that 18 of the 30 ships of Asopius had meanwhile returned (c. 7. § 3). See Steup, Rh. Mus. xxiv. p. 356. As the Mytileneans had said, c. 13. 21 h)\ u(ma=s ou)k a)munou=ntai e)piple/ontas h)\ a)p) a)mfote/rwn a)poxwrh/sontai, the words ou)k o)rqw=s e)gnw/kasin were already justified when the Athenians could, without recalling a ship from Lesbos, easily repel the Peloponnesian fleet.—5.

au)toi/ te . . . kai\ oi( me/toikoi: cf. i. 143. 4. Of citizens usually only the qh=tes, who were yiloi/ on land, served in the fleet (vi. 43. 10); in critical times members of the three upper classes, whose regular duty was hoplite service, might be pressed into service in the fleet (viii. 24. 12). See Bauer in Handbuch der klass. Alterthumsw. iv.^{1} p. 282; Schoemann, Gr. Ant. i. p. 448. The use of au)toi/ where the pentakosiome/dimnoi and i(ppei=s are excepted shows how much more numerous were the two lower classes, zeugi=tai and qh=tes. Regarding the census-classes, see Boeckh P. E.^{3} p. 579 ff.; Hermann Gr. Ant.^{6} i. § 68.— 7.

para\ to\n i)sqmo/n: along the coast of the isthmus. Const. with e)pi/deicin e)poiou=nto. They proposed by the mere display (e)pi/deicin) of a large fleet to show the enemy how hopeless was the execution of their plans. —

a)nagago/ntes: the unusual act. for a)nagago/menoi occurs also in the comp. a)ntana/gein, vii. 37. 18; 52. 4; viii. 38. 19; 83. 5. For the intr. use, cf. a)polipei=n, c. 10. 8. Kühn. 373, 2a. —8.

th=s *peloponnh/sou: part. gen. depending on h(=|, as i. 46. 17; ii. 4. 22. —

dokoi/h: for the form here, as in ii. 79. 26; 100. 22; iv. 105. 9, instead of dokoi= of the Mss., see St. Qu. Gr.^{2} p. 62. G. 737; H. 374 a.

o(rw=ntes polu\n to\n para/logon: seeing that their miscalculation was great. See on i. 65. 3. para/logos with polu/s also ii. 61. 14; 85. 6; me/gas, vii. 55. 4; o(/sos, i. 78. 3; tosou=tos, vii. 28. 17.—

ta\ u(po\ tw=n *lesbi/wn r(hqe/nta: cf. c. 13. § 3, 4. The form r(hqh=nai is about as common in Thuc. as lexqh=nai. Both together in c. 53. 14, 15.—10.

a)/pora nomi/zontes: regarding it as impracticable. For Thuc.'s freq. use of the neut. pl. of the adj., see on i. 7. 2. Kühn. 366.—11.

ou) parh=san: cf. c. 15. 10.—12.

kai\ h)gge/llonto kai/: the first kai/ is correl. of kai/ in l. 11, the second means also. Cf. c. 21. 10; 31. 8. h)gge/llonto in pers. const. with the partic., as in viii. 79. 21. GMT. 904; Kr. Spr. 56, 7, 3; Kühn. 482, 2. With inf., iv. 25. 23; viii. 94. 4. Oftener impers., as c. 110. 1; i. 114. 3; iv. 93. 7; 125. 2; v. 10. 7; vi. 45. 2.—

ai( peri\ th\n *pelopo/nnhson |

tria/konta |

nh=es: the 100 ships just mentioned, not the fleet under Asopius (c. 7. § 1), as clearly proved by Steup (Rh. Mus. xxiv. p. 355 ff.), who rightly strikes out tria/konta. See App.—13.

th\n perioiki/da au)tw=n: i.e. the district of the Lacedaemonian Perioeci in Laconia and Messenia.

u(/steron de\ . . . e)pipleu/sesqai: Thuc. mentions here, at the close of his account of the first unsuccessful attempt of the Lacedaemonians to aid the Lesbians, the preparations for the second expedition, made in the following summer (c. 25. § 1; 26. § 1). The regular course of the narrative is resumed at a)nexw/rhsan de\ kte(., u(/steron is common where such an anticipation in the narrative occurs. Cf. c. 7. 10; 34. 21; i. 64. 8; 87. 16; ii. 9. 7; 31. 15; 70. 20; 100. 4. —15.

o(/ ti pe/myousin: rel. with fut. indic. to express purpose, as in iv. 22. 2; viii. 1. 28. GMT. 565; Kr. Spr. 53, 7, 8; Kühn. 387, 4.—

e)ph/ggellon: imperabant. Cf. v. 47. 13; vii. 17. 2; viii. 108. 21. So perih/ggellon, ii. 85. 11; vii. 18. 27. The impfs. pareskeu/azon and e)ph/ggellon indicate gradual accomplishment, the aor. pros<*>tacan an ordinance which took effect immediately.—16.

nau/arxon: the commander of the Lacedaemonian navy was elected for a definite period, prob. a year, and had unlimited power. Cf. Arist. Pol. ii. 6. (9) 22 h( nauarxi/a sxedo\n e(te/ra basilei/a kaqe/sthke. Cf. ii. 66. 6; 80. 12. —17.

o(\s e)/mellen e)pipleu/sesqai: i.e. to sail on them as commander. Cf. c. 76. 6; ii. 66. 4; iv. 11. 6; viii. 39. 5.

e)peidh\ kai\ e)kei/nous ei)=don: sc. a)nakexwrhko/tas. Kr. Spr. 56, 16; Kühn. 599, 2. Cf. i. 78. 10; 80. 2; ii. 11. 34; 86. 14; v. 80. 11; vii. 69. 3.

Reflections evoked by the number of Attie ships then at sea, and remarks upon the exhaustion of the Attic treasury. This chapter is seen upon close examination to be clearly the work of a glossator, as Steup first argued in Rh. Mus. xxiv. p. 350. See App.

o(/n: kata/ is omitted with the rel. after the prepositional phrase, as usual in Attic writers. G. 1025; H. 1007; Kühn. 451, 4; Kr. Spr. 51, 11, 1.—

e)/pleon: were afloat. This pregnant force seems not to occur elsewhere. plei=n is never without pred, modification: whether local, as e)s *ai)/gupton, i. 110. 11; e)k th=s *milh/tou e)s to\n *(ellh/sponton, viii. 108. 12; or qualitative, as a)/rista, i. 48. 12; vii. 31. 22; viii. 104. 11; a)/meinon, ii. 84. 12; ou) spoudh=|, iii. 49. 14; <*>u)=, vii. 23. 11.—

e)n toi=s plei=stai: the purely formulaic e)n toi=s with the sup. is explained by some as intensive (H. 652 a; Kr. Spr. 49, 10, 6 and on i. 6, 6; Kühn. 349^{b}, 7 i; Madv. Syntax^{2} 96, 2, and others); by others as restrictive (Arn. here and vii. 19. 19; L. Herbst, Philol. xvi. p. 345 ff.; C. Spormann, de ellipsis apud Hdt. et Thuc. usu, 1888. p. 29 sqq., and others). Acc. to the latter view, not absolute pre-eminence, but prominence among competitors is indieated, so that e)n toi=s plei=stai would mean, among the most. At any rate, that e)n toi=s plei=stai (fem. with e)n toi=s also c. 82. 2) should be followed by paraplh/siai de\ kai\ e)/ti plei/ous, is very peculiar. With the first view, it must be assumed that the author corrected himself; with the second, it still seems strange that to a number thus emphasized another still greater should be immediately opposed. Steup thinks no absolutely certain case of the restrictive e)n toi=s with sup. has been found. Of the cases cited by Herbst, e)n toi=s is not formulaie in viii. 68. 4, kai\ *qhrame/nhs e)n toi=s cugkatalu/ousi to\n dh=mon prw=tos h)=n, while in viii. 90. 4, *)ari/starxos, a)nh\r e)n toi=s ma/lista kai\ e)k plei/stou e)nanti/os tw=| dh/mw|, the phrase e)n toi=s ma/lista might well mean most of all. On the other hand, in i. 6. 6 and iii. 82. 2 the thought, he claims, suits the context far better with e)n toi=s intensive; and in vii. 19. 19 only the intensive meaning is admissible, since Thuc. could hardly have meant to compare the departure of the o(lka/des carrying hoplites to Sicily (vii. 19. 19) with that of the 25 Corinthian triremes (vii. 17. 14) sent to engage the attention of the Athenian fleet at Naupactus, esp. as the triremes were despatched in the winter, the o(lka/des the following summer. But Steup's objection to rendering e)n toi=s prw=toi (vii. 19. 19) ‘among the first’ does not seem conclusive, and certainly Aristarchus (viii. 90. 4) was, as Herbst and Jow. say, not the ‘very’ foremost among the subverters of democracy. If all the cases of e)n toi=s with the sup. be compared, it is hard to escape Jow.'s conclusion, that the formula is sometimes restrictive, as in vii. 24. 12; viii. 90. 4; sometimes intensive, as in c. 81. 2 (cf. c. 85. 2); Plato Symp. 178 b.—2.

e)nergoi\ ka/llei: e)nergo/s is not elsewhere used of ships, and both words occur only here in Thucydides. Goell., Arn., and Jow. explain, ‘effective by their fine condition’; Bl., ‘effective and handsome’ (by their handsomeness); Sheppard, ‘on active service in handsome trim.’ Peile takes ka/llei as dat. consilii, for display. Of the emendations proposed—by Herbst ka/lw|s, St. kai\ a)/llh|, v. H. a)/llai a)/llh| —none is satisfactory.—3.

paraplh/siai de\ kai\ e)/ti plei/ous: for similar expressions, see on vii. 19. 8. See App.

th/n te ga\r . . . diako/sioi kai\ penth/konta: describes the disposition of the Attic fleet a)rxome/nou tou= pole/mou, which strangely alone of the two armaments here compared is more fully discussed. This follows necessarily from l. 15, kai\ nh=es tosau=tai dh\ plei=stai eplhrw/qhsan, which can only refer to the 250 ships of For if 250 was the highest number reached, this, acc. to 1. 3, paraplh/siai de\ kai\ e)/ti plei/ous a)rxome/nou tou= pole/mou, must refer to the first year of the war. Besides, the reader would be more likely to reckon for himself the number of ships of the summer under consideration (428) than that of 431 B.C. Further the words in l. 6 peri\ *potei/daian kai\ e)n toi=s a)/llois xwri/ois are unintelligible, if § 2 refers to the year 428.—5.

e(/terai e(kato/n: cf. ii. 23. § 2; 25; 30; 31. § 1.—6.

xwri\s de/: besides, abs., without expressed or easily supplied predicate. In the passages cited by St. as parallel (Plato Euthyd. 289 c.; Soph. O. C. 808), xwri/s means of a different kind, not besides. In Thuc. xwri\s de/ either has its own verb (ii. 31. 11), or the pred. of the preceding clause belongs also to it (i. 61. 15; ii. 97. 16; vi. 31. 29), or is to be supplied with it (ii. 13. 29; 31. 13). Here h)=san cannot be supplied from the preceding clause, since there it means ‘chanced to be.‘—

ai( peri\ . . . xwri/ois: see App.—7.

ai( pa=sai: in all. H. 672a; Kr. Spr. 50, 11, 13. Cf. c. 85. 12; i. 60. 6; vii. 1. 31.

tou=to: must refer grammatically to the number of ships either of 431 or 428 B.C. But as u(panali/skein, gradually consume (ll. 8, 14), suits neither of these cases, the author of the chapter must have meant to indicate by tou=to “this fitting out of such large armaments,”—a loose form of expression without parallel in Thuc. Besides, there seem to have been in the summer of 429 B.C., if one excepts the ships which may have remained on the Thracian coast after the capture of Potidaea, as well as the few at stations like Salamis and Atalante, only 40 Attie ships at sea at one time (ii. 80. 21; 85. 17).—

u(panh/lwse: gradually consumed. The word is found in Thuc. only here and l. 14 below. With neut. subj., as a)panali/skein, vii. 11. 13. Cf. c. 13. 33 u(f airou=ntes, i. 77. 23 u(pedei/cate. On the augment see St. Qu. Gr.^{2} p. 60; Meisterhans,^{2} p. 137.

meta\ *hoteidai/as: Potidaea had been already for a year and a half again in the possession of the Athenians (ii. 70). But still more strange is the manner in which Potidaea is here set over against the fitting out of large naval armaments, since Potidaea itself had been besieged by a fleet (i. 64. § 3). The costs of this siege had been 2000 talents (ii. 70. § 2). Besides, the building of ships had doubtless entailed considerable expense.—

di/draxmoi: i.e. one drachma each for the hoplite and for his attendant, more than usual, since the average daily pay of a hoplite was 4 obols. Cf. vii. 27. 7. See Boeckh P. E. p. 373; Herm. Gr. Ant. i.^{6} § 112. The word is found here only in Thuc., and seldom elsewhere.—10.

e)frou/roun: obsidebant, as periefrourou=nto, c. 21. 15. Cf. Arr. Anab. i. 7. 10; ii. 1. 4; iv. 3. 4; 5. 2; and Eur. Or. 760 fulasso/mesqa frouri/oisi pantaxh=|. Elsewhere in Thuc., to garrison or guard, as i. 103. 15; 107. 16; iv. 1. 16; v. 33. 6, 10; 35. 28; 64. 12; vii. 60. 11. In the passage cited by Pp. and others, i. 64. 2, 4, there is no reason why both e)frou/roun and frourei=n may not be intr., keep watch (cf. c. 90. 11; ii. 80. 22; 83. 7; iv. 24. 2; 66. 20). —

au(tw=|: for sing, after preceding plur., cf. i. 120. 20 a)ndrw=n swfro/nwn . . . h(do/menon. Otherwise such a const. is without parallel in Thuc., though common in Hdt. Cf. Plato Prot. 324 a ou)dei\s kola/zei tou\s a)dikou=ntas . . . <*>ou/ion e(/nela, o(/<*>i h)di/lhoen. Kr. Spr. 61, 4, 1.—

u(phre/th|: as in vi. 102. 10. Each Athenian hoplite was accompanied by an attendant, qera/pwn, just as each Spartan by a Helot. Cf. iv. 16. 9.—

e)la/mbane: sc. o(pli/ths e(/kastos, to be supplied from di/draxmoi o(pli=tai. e(/kastos e)la/mbanon was to be expected (cf. vii. 27. 8). The omission of e(/kastos is without parallel in Thuc., or even in Hdt.—11.

trisxi/lioi kte(.: see App.—12.

diepolio/rkhsan: a(/pac ei)rhme/non. Schol. e)/meinan e(/ws a(lw/sews th=s po/lews poliorkou=ntes.— e(cako/sioi de\ kai\ xi/lioi kte(.: cf. i. 64. 8; 65. 13, and see on ii. 31. 11.— 13.

to\n au)to\n misqo/n: i.e. a drachma per man, since the seamen had no qera/pontes. This was double the usual pay of seamen. Cf. vi. 31. 19; viii. 45. 11, and see Boeckh, P. E. p. 377. —

e)/feron; Schol. e)la/mbanon, as vi. 24. 13; viii. 97. 7.

dh/: as l. 2 with the sup., so here with the emphatic tosau=tai. Cf. i. 33. 13; ii. 17. 17; 77. 7.—

plei=stai: pred., as the largest number, i.e. 250.

After the Mytileneans fail in the attack on Methymna, and the Methymneans, on the other hand, are repulsed with loss from Antissa, the Athenians send reinforcements under Paches to Lesbos and invest Mytilene with a wall. Beginning of the winter 428-427 B.C.

*mutilhnai=oi de/: opp. to oi( de\ *lakedaimo/nioi, c. 16. 9, as well as to oi( *)aqhnai=oi, c. 16. 18, and resumes the narrative interrupted at c. 6 fin. —

o(/n: see on c. 17. 1.—2.

peri\ to\n i)sqmo/n: cf. c. 15. 5 to 16. 14.—

e)pi\ *mh/qumnan: cf. c. 2. 2, 9.—

w(s prodidome/nhn: pres. partic. because the betrayal was, as they thought, then being agitated or prepared for. Kühn. 382, 6 b.—3.

oi( e)pi/kouroi: prob. mercenaries, mention of whom is made c. 2. 8. The term, which meant originally allies, was chiefly applied, prob. cuphemistically, to hired soldiers in the service of despots or oligarchical factions. See on i. 115. 18.—4.

ou) prouxw/rei: impers., as in i. 109. 7; ii. 56. 12; iv. 59. 16. See on i. 109. 7.—5.

e)p) *)anti/sshs kai\ *pu/rras kai\ *)ere/sou: which, though already siding with the Mytileneans, were to be secured against overtures of the democratic party.—6.

katasthsa/menoi: with pred. adj. (bebaio/tera), as i. 118. 8.— 7.

kratu/nantes: a poetic word; act., also i. 69. 2; mid., c. 82. 40; iv. 52. 13; 114. 10. In tragedy it = kratei=n.— tei/xh: without article, see on c. 3. 16.

e)stra/teusan de/: emphatic repetition of the verb, l. 3 (e)panafora/). See on i. 28. 8. A favourite usage of Hdt.—9.

e)kbohqei/as: a sortie, found only here; corresponding to e)kbohqei=n, i. 105. 29; Hdt. ix. 26. 11, and freq. in late writers.—10.

plhge/ntes: mega/lws nikhqe/ntes, Schol. Used only in aor. or pf. pass. and always in sense of a severe defeat. Cf. iv. 108. 25; v. 14. 5; viii. 38. 7; Hdt. v. 120. 7; viii. 130. 10; Soph. O. C. 605; Eur. Rhes. 867.—

tw=n e)pikou/rwn: i.e. those whom the Mytileneans had left there as a garrison, as indicated in katasthsa/menoi . . . bebaio/tera above. —11.

polloi/, oi( loipoi/: const. as in c. 13. 17.

tau=ta: explained by the two following partic. clauses, which are construed with punqano/menoi, as if tau=ta had not preceded. Kühn. 469, 3 c. Cf. Soph. Phil. 1355 tw=s tau=t) e)canasxh/sesqe, toi=sin *)atre/ws e)me\ cuno/nta paisi/n, Ar. Nub. 380 touti/ m) e)lelh/qein, o( *zeu\s ou)k w)/n.—13. th=s gh=s kratou=ntas: cf. c. 6. 8.—14.

ei)/rgein: to shut in the Mytileneans. Cf. —

peri\ to\ fqino/pwron h)/dh a)rxo/menon: cf. c. 100. 6, and see on ii. 31. l. meto/pwron, in vii. 79. 10; viii. 108. 9, seems to be synonymous with fqino/pwron.—15. xili/ous o(pli/tas: cf. Diod. xii. 85. The number of the fleet is not given here, because the object of the expedition is to strengthen the land force, not the fleet.

au)tere/tai: pred. The unusual fact that hoplites here served at the oar, evidently for economieal reasons (cf. c. 19. § 1), is esp. emphasized. Cf. i. 10. 26; vi. 91. 15.—17.

a)fiknou=ntai kai\ periteixi/zousi . . . e)gkatw|kodo/mh-

tai: Cl. explains ‘to the historical presents corresponds the pf. e)gkatw|kodo/mhtai, which seems to be used with reference to the forts (frou/ria) first built at suitable points (e)pi\ karterw=n), in which the troops found safety while resting, as well as at night: “they proceed to invest the city with a single wall, and already at strong points in the circuit of the wall forts have been built in.” Hence the changes proposed, e)gkatw|kodo/mhto (Haase), e)gkatoikodomei=tai (Bl.), e)gkat w|kodomh/qh (Bk.), e)gkatw|kodo/mhsan (Kr.) are unnecessary.’ Arn. compares Caes. Bell. Civ. iii. 37 erant enim circum castra Pompeii permulti editi atque asperi colles; hos primum praesidiis tenuit, castellaque ibi communiit; inde ut loci cuiusque natura ferebat, ex castello in castellum producta munitione, circumvallare Pompeium instituit. But Steup, who contends that the frou/ria were constructed at the same time with the wall and built in after the manner of the pu/rgoi in the double wall around Plataea (c. 21. 8), insists that the pf. is out of place here, since a mere statement of an occurrence was to be made, and that the aor. or impf. is required (cf. c. 7. 11; 70. 28 74. 3).—

e)n ku/klw|: also c. 74. 8; elsewhere without e)n, i. 106. 6; ii. 78. 4; 84. 3, etc.—18.

e)/stin oi(=: so most editt. read; Bk. and Bl., e)/stin h(=| with five Mss.—

e)pi\ tw=n karterw=n: cf. c. 110. 7; ii. 100. 3.

kai\ . . . ei)/rgeto: cf. the conclusion of the account of the siege of Potidaea, i. 64. § 3.—

kata\ kra/tos: applied to any energetic use of force, as in i. 64. 14, and freq.—20.

kai\ e)k gh=s kai\ e)k qala/sshs ei)/rgeto: what had been already in part effected (c. 6. 7) is now completed. Cf. viii. 40. 6.

At Athens an extraordinary war tax is levied for the first time. Lysicles, sent out to Caria to collect taxes, is killed there.

kai\ au)toi/: et ipsi, proleptic, referring to the demands made also upon the allies, kai\ e)pi\ tou\s cumma/xous. —e)sfora/n: i.e. the extraordinary war tax often levied in later times. See Boeckh, P. E. p. 612, who says, doubtless correctly, that to/te prw=ton (cf. i. 96. 6; ii. 56. 6) ‘does not mean merely the first property tax levied in the Peloponnesian war, but the first absolutely.’—3.

diako/sia ta/-

lanta: appos. to e)sfora/n. Cf. i. 96. 6; ii. 15. 17.—4.

a)rgurolo/gous nau=s: cf. iv. 50. 2; 75. 3. Cl. thinks that the ships were sent out to collect back tribute (see Köhler, Abh. der Berl. Akad. 1869, p. 132 f.), and that the unusual number of strathgoi/ (5 with 12 ships) was due to the fact that this duty would have to be performed at different points. But St. justly insists that kai\ au)toi\ e)senegko/ntes indicates that the same kind of extraordinary tax (e)sfora/) was levied on both citizens and allies.—

*lusikle/a: doubtless the demagogue ridieuled in Ar. Eq. 132 as probatopw/lhs, who married Aspasia after Pericles's death. See Plut. Per. 24; also Curtius, Hist. of Gr. iii. p. 90, and Ad. Schmidt, das Perikl. Zeitalter i. p. 178 ff.

a)/lla h)rgurolo/gei: laid other regions under contribution. The accus. as in ii. 69. 7; viii. 3. 2. The like issue of an expedition sent to the neighbouring coast, as described in ii. 69, shows with what bitterness the half barbarian inhabitants of these regions resisted the collection of the Athenian tribute.—6.

th=s *kari/as e)k *muou=ntos: order as in c. 89. 7; 105. 9; i. 100. 15.—7.

tou= *sandi/ou lo/fou: Meineke (Herm. iii. p. 363) conjectures *sa/ndios (nom. *sa/ndis,—see on i. 64. 10).—8.

*)anaiitw=n: without doubt those mentioned c. 32. 4 as *sami/wn tw=n e)c *)anai/wn, namely those of the oligarchical party, who after the subjugation of Samos (i. 117. § 3) settled on the opposite coast. Cf. iv. 75. 7 ta\ *)/anaia e)pi\ th=| *sa/mw|, and viii. 19. 3. These were always with the enemies of Athens.—

a)/llhs: besides. Cf. c. 112. 7 *dhmosqe/nhs . . . kai\ to\ a)/llo straten/ma. See on i. 2. 12; 128. 21. G. 966, 2; H. 705; Kr. Spr. 50, 4, 11. Cf. Xen. Cyrop. vi. 4. 1; Tac. Hist. iv. 56 legatis . . . interfectis ceterum vulgus facile accessurum.

The beleaguered Plataeans determine upon a sortie and make preparations to that end. The events of this and the following chapters are briefly narrated also by Pseudo-Dem. lix. 103; Polyaen. vi. 19. § 2, 3; Diod. xii. 56.

e)/ti . . . *boiwtw=n: cf. ii. 78. § 2 ff. —3.

si/tw| e)pilipo/nti: partic. in pred. position in the sense of the verbal subst., = th=| e)pilei/yei tou= si/tou. Cf. c. 29. 9.—4.

timwri/as: = bohqei/as in Thuc. (i. 25. 2, 11; 38. 15; 58. 5; 69. 30, etc.) and Hdt. (iii. 148. 14; vii. 169. 11); later, ‘vengeance.’— 5.

e)pibouleu/ousin: in this signification only here in Thuc. with inf. (e)celqei=n), freq. with verbal subst. (a)poxw/rhsin, c. 109. 21; kata/lusin th=| turanni/di, vi. 54. 15; to\n e)/kploun, vii. 51. 5). For other examples with the inf., cf. Hdt. i. 24. 8; Plato Symp. 203 b; and see Herbst on Xen. Sympos. 4. 52, and Stallbaum on Plato Prot. 343 c.—

*)aqhnai/wn oi( cumpoliorkou/menoi: cf. ii. 6. § 4; 78. § 3. —7.

bia/sasqai: ‘to force their way through,’ abs. in const., as in vii. 67. 24; 79. 8.—

e)shghsame/nou th\n pei=ran: having suggested the attempt. e)shgei=sqai = auctorem esse, also iv. 76. 8; vi. 90. 3; 99. 7; vii. 73. 5. —8.

a)ndro\s ma/ntews: for the subst. indicating vocation used as adj., see on i. 115. 9; Kr. Spr. 57, 1, 1; Kühn. 405, 1. Soothsayers in the army are mentioned also Hdt. ix. 37; Xen. Hell. ii. 4. 19.—9.

*eu)pompidou: so with Bk. (after Palat.) in preference to the clearly incorrect *eu)polpi/dou (of the remaining better Mss.), as also to *eu)molpi/dou (of inferior Mss.), which Pp. prefers. The name occurs nowhere else, but its very rareness made it more likely to be miscopied.—

o(\s kai\ e)strath/gei: who was also strategus, seems to indicate that the attitude of Eupompidas was of esp. importance to the plan of the Plataeans. A similar plan of the strategus Aristeus during the siege of Potidaea (i. 65. § 1) was unsuccessful. Cf. also viii. 51. 8; 98. 4. Cl.'s explanation, ‘who also directed the execution’ of the plan, will not do, since, acc. to c. 22. 1, Eupompidas was not alone in the direction of the scheme. Besides, such an anticipation in the narrative would require the aor. (cf. i. 14. 15).

a)pw/knhsan: as in c. 30. 12 (cf. vi. 92. 23; viii. 12. 2), with ki/ndunon as obj., which belongs also with me/gan h(ghsa/menoi. Bl. compares Dem. xviii. 197 ou)de/na ki/ndunon o)knh/sas i)/dion, and the imitation of Procopius B. G. i., p. 180, 11 tw=n de\ i)o/ntwn oi( u(pe\r h(/misu, katwrrwdhko/tes to\n ki/ndunon, o)pi/sw a)pekomi/zonto. St. takes a)pw/knhsan as abs., as in c. 55. 10; iv. 11. 16; vii. 21. 23, supplying from above e)celqei=n kai\ u(<*> erbh=nai ta\ tei/xh.—pws: with omission of unnecessary details.—11.

e)s a)/ndras diakosi/ous kai\ ei)/kosi ma/lista: about two hundred and twenty, the prepositional phrase representing the subject, as in c. 85. 5; the object, in c. 111. 17; 114. 22; iv. 80. 17; v. 6. 22; vii. 30. 16. Kühn. 432, 1; Kr. Spr. 60, 8, 1. Though Arn. be right in saying that in the examples collected by Matth., Gr. Gr. 298, 1, e)s = up to, ma/lista certainly gives here the signification about. See on c. 21. 4.— 12.

e)ne/meinan: with dat. in figurative sense also viii. 23. 24.—

e)qelontai/: the resolution adopted by the whole had therefore been annulled.

e)poih/santo: the mid., as with nau=s, i. 14. 14; viii. 56. 21; staurw/mata, vi. 74. 12.—

i)/sas: sc. to\ mh=kos. Cf. vii. 42. 10; viii. 10. 8, and freq., where the term denoting number is omitted.—

cunemetrh/santo: sc. ta\s kli/makas, with Heilm. (cf. l. 20), rather than to\ tei=xos (Pp.). cun- indicates the combination of particulars toward a result, as cuntekmhra/menoi, ii. 76. 5. Cf. Hdt. iv. 158. 6 cummetrhsa/menoi th\n w(/rhn th=s h(me/ras. As further instances of the same expedient adopted under similar cireumstances, Bl. cites Procop. B. G. i. 21; Polyaen. vii. 10. 5; Liv. xxv. 23.—14.

tai=s e)pibolai=s: by the layers, instrum. dative. G. 1181; H. 776; Kühn. 425, 6.—15.

ou)k e)calhlimme/non: ‘not whitewashed, a term found in Proeop. de Aedif. p. 4, 22 and 27, 31; Levit. xiv. 42, 43, and 48. Thus Pollux vii. 124 tita/nw| xri/ein, a)lei/fein, e)palei/fein, katalei/fein, e)calei/fein. And so Eustathius explains a)lei/fein toi=xon by to\ koni/a| xri/ein. Hence it appears that the translators have here wrongly rendered e)calhlimme/non, “plastered over.”’ Bl.—

h)riqmou=nto de\ polloi\ . . . kai\ e)/mellon: paratactic connexion, in effect = e)pei\ polloi\ h)riqmou=nto, e)/mellon kte(.; while, on the other hand, e)/mellon oi( me/n tines a(marth/sesqai, oi( de\ plei/ous teu/cesqai = kai\ ei) oi( me/n tines h(ma/rtanon, o(/mws oi( plei/ous teu/cesqai e)/mellon. The rare mid. h)riqmou=nto does not differ in meaning from the act., as in Plato Phaedr. 270d. For other examples, see Steph. Thes. s.v. Kr. Spr. 52, 8, 4; Kühn. 375, 4.—16.

e)/mellon: see on c. 11. 4; i. 107. 13.—19.

r(a|di/ws kaqorwme/nou e)s o(\ e)bou/lonto tou= tei/xous: sc. kaqora=n. Cf. Hdt. v. 35. 17 katide/sqai e)s th\n kefalh/n. kaqorwme/nou is grammatically construed with tou= tei/xous, though logically the subj. is e)s o(\ e)bou/lonto tou= tei/xous. The sense of the passage (a(/ma ou) polu\ a)pe/xontes . . . tou= tei/xous) seems to be: “as they were not far off, but easily looked down upon the part of the wall which they wished to see.” It is admissible to supply o(ra=n from kaqorwme/nou. Cf. Eur. Alc. 1065 dokw= ga\r au)th\n ei)sorw=n gunai=x) o(ra=n. For the const. o(ra=n e)/s ti, cf. Dem. vi. 10 ei)s ta\ paro/nta o(rw=n, Aesch. Suppl. 110 i)de/sqw ei)s u(/brin, Eur. Peliad. frg. 7 o(rw=si d' oi( dido/ntes ei)s ta\ xrh/mata, Paus. i. 24. 2 e)s au)tou\s kaiome/nous o(ra=|. The part of the wall referred to is, of course, h(=| e)/tuxe pro\s sfa=s ou)k e)calhlimme/non (l. 15). See App.

th\n cumme/trhsin . . . e)/labon: periphrasis, as in Plut. Aem. Paul. 15 meqo/dw| kai\ di) o)rga/nwn ei)lhfe/nai dokei= th\n me/trhsin. For similar periphrases, cf. Soph. Aj. 345; Phil. 536. —21.

th=s pli/nqou: the sing. used collectively, as to\n a)ristero\n po/da, c. 22. 11; th=s kefalh=s, ii. 49. 5; th=s new/s, vii. 62. 14; 65. 7. One might infer from this passage that one thickness of bricks prevailed at that time in Greece, at any rate, in Boeotia.—

ei)ka/santes: aor. partic., synchronous with e)/labon. Cf. ii. 68. 10. Kr. Spr. 53, 6, 8.

Description of the wall of circumvallation and of the manner of guarding it.

du/o tou\s peribo/lous: the pred. position of du/o perhaps emphasizes the special precaution against an attack also from without.—

pro\s *plataiw=n: on the side toward Plataea. Kr. Spr. 68, 37, 1. Cf. iv. 31. 5; 100. 15; 130. 2.—4.

ma/lista: as used with statements of quantity implies approximation, though the reality may be more or less. Cf. c. 109. 9; 113. 10; i. 13. 11.

to\ ou)=n metacu\ tou=to, oi( e(kkai/deka po/des . . . w)|kodo/mhto: this interval, the 16 feet, had been buill up as dwelling-places assigned severally to the guards. oi)kh/mata is pred., though Thuc. seems, by a sort of anacoluthon, to have construed w)|kodo/mhto rather with it than with to\ metacu\ tou=to, as the following cunexh= shows. Cl., who thinks the irregularity is caused by the insertion of oi( e(kkai/deka po/des, explains oi)kh/mata as the real subj. of both members, with to\ metacu\ tou=to as adv. modifier. St. strikes out, with v. H. and Widmann, oi( e(kkai/deka po/des, and explains oi)kh/mata dianenhme/na as accus., after the analogy of o)/noma o)noma/zesqai, i. 122. 25. Bl. cites a case of appos. similar to oi( e(kkai/deka po/des from App. Bell. Civ. iv. 106 to\ de\ me/son tw=n lo/fwn, ta\ o)ktw\ sta/dia, di/odos h)=n.—6. dianenhme/na: cf. ii. 17. 18, where the more unusual katanei/masqai is used.—

kai\ h)=n cunexh=: sc. ta\ oi)kh/mata, though Steup thinks this incompatible with the rest of the sent., and renders, it was continuous (i.e. the peri/boloi were connected), the neut. pl. being indef., as in i. 7. 2; 8. 8; 102. 6.

dia\ de/ka e)pa/lcewn: at intervals of ten battlements, i.e. there were ten battlements or turrets between each two of the greater towers. See Steph. Thes. s. v. dia/. G. 1206, 1 c; H. 795, 1 e; Külm. 434, i. 1 b; Kr. Spr. 68, 22, 3. Cf. di) o)li/gou, l. 13; di<*>e/xontes, c. 22. 8.—8.

i)soplatei=s: rare word for i)/soi to\ pla/tos. Thuc. is fond of compounds in i)so- (i)sodi/aitos, i)soki/ndunos, i)so/nomos, i)sopalh/s, i)soplhqh/s, i)so/rropos, i)so/yhfos). Cf. Aesch. Agam. 1444, 1471.—9.

dih/kontes e)/s te to\ e)/sw . . . kai\ to\ e)/cw: i.e. the towers united the two walls as if by a bridge. The first kai/ means and, the second also. See on c. 16. 12; 31. 8. e)s is omitted before to\ e)/cw with nearly all the Mss. Kühn. 451, 2. See on i. 6. 20; vi. 78. 4. oi( au)toi/, which is pred., stands in the second clause, as in i. 23. 13, not in the first, as in c. 47. 18; ii. 40. 12; iv. 17. 3. It seems unnecessary to omit either the first kai/ with L. Herbst (Philol. xxiv. p. 681), or kai\ oi( au)toi/ with Cobet. —10.

w(/ste pa/rodon mh\ ei)=nai para\ pu/rgon: so that it was impossible to pass by a tower, i.e. either on the inner or on the outer side. ei)=nai in pregnant sense, = u(pa/rxein, as often, particularly after a neg. See on i. 2. 5. para\ pu/rgon is bracketed by St., following Naber (in v. H.'s Stud. Thuc. p. 39). But it makes the sense clearer, and the sing. before di) au)tw=n is used collectively.—11.

dih=|san: sc. oi( fu/lakes, i.e. in going from one metapu/rgion to another. For change from inf. to finite verb after w(/ste, see GMT. 603.

xeimw\n notero/s: the adj. is not pred., but forms with xeimw/n a single conception, rain-storm. Schol. di/ugros kai\ u(eto\n e)/xwn. The same idea is expressed in c. 22. 2 by xeime/rion u(/dati kai\ a)ne/mw|. xeimw/n is so used iv. 6. 6; 103. 5.—13.

o)/ntwn: as usual in supplementary causal clauses, placed first. Cf. c. 2. 9; i. 124. 4.—

di) o)li/gou: at a little distance, as c. 43. 14; ii. 89. 41; vii. 71. 9.—14.

periefrourou=nto: found only here in Thuc., and elsewhere only in late writers, e.g. Dio C. x See on c. 17. 10.

The 220 Plataeans, who persist in their purpose, scale on a rainy night the encompassing wall.

pareskeu/asto: the impers. pass., rarer in Greek than in Latin. See on i. 46. 1. G. 1240, 2; H. 602; Kr. Spr. 61, 5, 6; Kühn. 378, N. 2.—

thrh/santes . . . a)se/lhnon: thrh/santes also i. 65. 4; iv. 27. 10; vi. 2. 21; as fula/cantes, ii. 3. 17; vii. 83. 15. Cf. Dion. H. Ant. iii. 65. 2 fula/cantes nu/kta xeime/rion u(/dasi kai\ a)ne/mw|, Dio C. lxxxi. 12 e)th/rhse nu/kta a)se/lhnon kai\ u(etw=| la/brw| brontai=s te xeime/rion. For other imitations see Bl.'s translation (note). The rain was mixed with snow, as shown by a)ne/mw| u(poneifome/nh, c. 23. 25.—2.

e)ch=|san: impf. of the act in progress, as i. 26. 23; 49. 2, the details of the execution being expressed by aors. die/bhsan (3), prose/meican (4).—3.

oi(/per kai\ th=s pei/ras ai)/tioi h)=san: see on c. 20. 7, 9.—4.

h(\ periei=xen au)tou/s: i.e. the inner ditch next to the besieged.—

prose/meican tw=| tei/xei: they reached the foot of the wall. prose/meican of approach also c. 31. 12; i. 46. 8; vi. 104. 19. On the form see St. Qu. Gr.^{2} p. 39; Meisterhans, p. 144.—6.

a)na\ to\ skoteino\n me/n: in the darkness. a)na/ of local extension also iv. 72. 11 (Kühn. 433, 1, 2); not found elsewhere in Thucydides. For position of me/n, see Kühn. 528, 1.—

ou) proido/ntwn, ou) katakousa/ntwn: without obj., in the general sense of see and hear. The gens. abs. after preceding accus. (tou\s fu/lakas), on account of the independent importance of the causes expressed. GMT. 850; H. 972 d; Kr. Spr. 47, 4, 2; Kühn. 494 b. Cf. c. 13. 30; i. 114. 2.—

au)tw=n: sc. tw=n fula/kwn.—yo/fw| tw=|: this order, by which stress is thrown on the attribute, is freq. in Thuc. See on i. 1. 6. The dat. depends on a)ntipatagou=ntos, which is found only here in Thuc.; elsewhere only in late writers, e.g. Arr. Anab. v. 12. 3; Dio C. xlviii. 48; Plut. Mor. 1000 b.

die/xontes polu/: cf. ii. 81. 14. The measure of polu/ here of course must not be supposed greater than necessity demanded.—9.

ta\ o(/pla: placed for emphasis between o(/pws and mh/. Cf. viii. 45. 15.—10.

eu)stalei=s th=| o(pli/sei: = yiloi/, 14, 17. kou/fhn o(/plisin peribeblhme/noi, Schol. Cf. Aesch. Pers. 797 eu)stalh= sto/lon. The armour was of various sorts, acc. to § 3.—

to\n a)ristero\n po/da mo/non . . . pro\s to\n phlo/n: the emphasis seems to be on mo/non, i.e. only the left foot was shod, the right being bare to prevent slipping in the mud. Cf. Sall. Jug. 94, Ceterum illi, qui escensuri erant, praedocti ab duce, arma ornatumque mutaverant, capite atque pedibus nudis, uti prospectus nisusque per saxa facilius foret. Arnold quotes from Scott's Lay of Last Minstrel iv. 8, “Each better knee was bared to aid The warrior in the escalade.” But many editt. think the meaning is, that the left foot was shod for security against slipping, the right unshod dia\ koufo/thta, as the Schol. explains. See App.

kata\ . . . prose/misgon pro\s ta\s e)pa/lceis: what is summarily stated at l. 5 in the aor. is here repeated, with somewhat more exact designation of the point of attack, in the impf., which tense prevails as far as e)/mellon, With prose/misgon pro\s ta\s e)pa/lceis, cf. vii. 22. 8 pro\s ta\s e)nto\s prosmei=cai. But see App.—13.

ei)do/tes o(/ti e)rh=moi/ ei)si: sc. on account of the nu\c xeime/rios, as explained c. 21. § 4. —

prw=ton me\n . . . (19)

e)/feron: see App.—14.

prose/qesan, (16)

a)ne/bh: these two particular facts alone of the whole account are expressed by the aorist. Arn. says, ‘The transition from painting a seene to stating a fact is marked by the variation of tense from a)ne/bainon to a)ne/bh; the first represents the party in the very act of mounting the wall, the second records the fact that their commander was the first man who did mount it.’ —

e)/peita, (17)

e)/peita: after prw=ton me/n, cf. Xen. Cyrop. i. 3. 14.—

cu\n cifidi/w| kai\ qw/raki: for the collective sing., see Kr. Spr. 44, 1, 7. Cf. ii. 70. 14. For the use of cu/n, which is chiefly poetic, seldom occurring in Attie prose except in Xen., see G. 1217; Kühn. 431, 2.—16.

meta\ de\ au)to\n oi( e(po/menoi: i.e. Ammeas and his eleven companions, who were to attack in two squads of six each the two nearest towers.—20.

ei)=en: for the form, see on c. 42. 22. St. Qu. Gr.^{2} p. 62.

h)/|sqonto: without expressed obj. as i. 95. 21; 118. 9, etc.—

oi( e)k tw=n pu/rgwn fu/lakes: for the attraction of the prep., see on c. 5. 1 and i. 8. 9. —23.

dou=pon: Cl. has adopted this reading of one Ms. (A), instead of the vulg. yo/fon, with Bk., Goell., and St., on the ground that it is not only the more appropriate, but also the rarer word, and hence rather to be attributed to Thuc. than to the copyist. It is used chiefly in poetry, but occurs in Xen. Anab. ii. 2. 19. But the vulg. seems to be supported by the imitations which Bl. cites from Dio C. (xliii. 11 and xliv. 17), where yo/fon is read.

to\ de\ strato/pedon e)pi\ to\ tei=xos w(/rmhsen: i.e. the garrison, which had gone into shelter from the rain, now hastened each to his own station on the wall. strato/pedon, troops, without reference to any fixed array, as in ii. 25. 9, and freq.—25.

to\ deino/n: the danger. Cf. 11; 84. 8; 120. 13.—

skoteinh=s nukto\s . . . o)/ntos: the partic. belongs to both substs., skoteinh=s nukto/s being treated as a single word.—26.

tw=n *plataiw=n: the part. gen. in the very unusual position between the art. and partic., as in c. 36. 19; 65. 14; i. 126. 33; vi. 102. 1. See Merriam, Trans. Am. Philol. Assoc. 1882, p. 45. Kr. Spr. 47, 9, 11. —27.

prose/ballon: so Steup reads (for the vulg. prose/balon), with two Mss. (C and f), as being more natural in describing an event that was not momentary, and in accordance with the following impfs. Cf. esp. parani=sxon, 1.35.—28.

e)k tou)/mpalin h)/: from the opposite side. e)/mpalin h)/ also in Hdt. i. 207. 13; ix. 56. 8. h)/ as in tou)nanti/on h)/, vi. 68. 14; vii. 80. 6; Plato Gorg. 481 c.—29.

u(pere/bainon: with the corresponding oi( u(perbai/nontes (c. 23. 1), of what was at that time going on.—

pro\s au)tou\s to\n nou=n e)/xoien: give attention to them. Cf. vii. 19. 32; viii. 8. 16.

e)qorubou=nto: were in great exeitement. Cf. v. 65. 28.

kata\ xw/ran: at their post. Cf. i. 28. 18. —31.

e)k th=s au(tw=n fulakh=s: from the post assigned to each. au(tw=n, or <*>(autw=n, is both by position and emphasis preferable to au)tw=n of most of the Mss.; for as the ou)dei/s clause is only the complement of kata\ xw/ran me/nontes, the pl. au(tw=n refers back to the subj. of e)qorubou=nto. G. 960; H. 673b. Cf. c. 91. 6; viii. 48. 28. St. reads au)tw=n (intensive). Kr. Spr. 47, 9, 12.—

e)n a)po/rw| h)=san ei)ka/sai to\ gigno/menon: they were at a loss to conjecture what was going on. Cf. i. 25. 2 e)n a)po/rw| ei)/xonto qe/sqai to\ paro/n.

oi( triako/sioi: for the art., see on c. 3. 18. The number is a favourite one for a corps of picked men, esp. among the Lacedaemonians. See Trieber, N. Jahrbb. ciii. p. 443 ff. Cf. ii. 25. 17; iv. 70. 14; 125. 19. —33.

e)te/takto: impers., as in c. 61. 12, and with dat. and inf., as i. 19. 6; v. 31. 10 (Kr., e)pete/takto; Cobet, prosete/takto).—

e)xw/roun e)/cw tou= tei/xous pro\s th\n boh/n: since the towers from which the ery of alarm came were, as all the rest, i)soplatei=s tw=| tei/xei (c. 21. 9), one could not know whether the danger was from the eity or from without; but under the circumstances it was natural to think first of danger from without, i.e. from Athens. And so the 300, as well as the guards of the remaining towers, left the Plataeans, who were crossing, for the time unmolested. e)xw/roun pro\s th\n boh/n, i.e. to the place whence the ery came, in the proper sense of bohqei=n. The fruktoi\ pole/mioi were signals to indicate danger from the enemy. Cf. ii. 94. 1. From this place and c. 80. 7, Arn. infers (against the Schol. and Polyb. x. 40) considerable proficiency in the art of signalling. See Merriam, Telegraphing among the Ancients, Arch. Inst. Am., Classical Series iii. —35.

parani=sxon: lit. raised by the side of, i.e. so as to counteract the others. The compound not found elsewhere in Thuc.; intr. in Plut. Aemil. Paul. 32.—37.

o(/pws . . . h)=| kai\ mh\ bohqoi=en: the same change of mood as in vi. 96. 18, 19; vii. 17. 15, 17; viii. 87. 14, 17. GMT. 321; Kr. Spr. 54, 8, 2; Kühn. 553, 6.—38.

th=s fruktwri/as: as Ar. Aves 1161; Aesch. Agam. 33, 490. Cf. fruktwroi/, viii. 102. 2; fruktwrei=n, c. 80. 7.—40.

oi( e)cio/ntes: cf. c. 20. 6; 22. 2.—

pri\n diafu/goien: opt. by assimilation after mh\ bohqoi=en. GMT. 643; Kühn. 399, 6b.—41.

tou= a)sfalou=s a)ntila/bointo: reach safety. Cf. iv. 128. 12; vii. 60. 17; 77. 29. For the gen., see G. 1099; H. 738; Kühn. 416, 2.

They succeed in crossing the wall and the outer ditch.

oi( u(perbai/nontes tw=n *plataiw=n: these words are the general subj. of the whole sent., which is afterwards distributed into oi( me/n (7), oi( de/ (9). The expression stands, as sfw=n oi( a)/ndres oi( e)cio/ntes, c. 22. 40, opp. to oi( e)n th=| po/lei tw=n *plataiw=n u(poleleimme/noi, c. 22. 27, or oi( e)k th=s po/lews *plataih=s, c. 22. 36; 24. 15, and answers to the const. e)k tou)/mpalin h)\ oi( a)/ndres au)tw=n u(pere/bainon, c. 22. 29. The pres. partic. is used to designate all the participants so long as the undertaking lasts. See on c. 4. 13. —2.

w(s oi( prw=toi au)tw=n . . . e)pibohqei=n: parenthetical subord. clause. See Steup, following Pp., Rh. Mus. xxxiii. p. 253 f. Most commentators end the parenthetical clause at e)kekrath/kesan, and make te, in l. 4, correl. to kai/ in But, with this const., a)po\ tw=n pu/rgwn . . . ba/llontes would be a mere repetition of ta/s te dio/dous . . . e)pibohqei=n. The first part of the parenthetical clause is not resumptive, but progressive, since above (c. 22. 21) only a number of the detachment of Ammeas was said to have ascended the wall, while here oi( prw=toi au)tw=n includes not only the whole twelve, but also those armed with spears.—3.

tou= pu/rgou e(kate/rou: cf. c. 22. 17.—4.

ta\s dio/dous tw=n pu/rgwn: i.e. the passages through the lower part of the towers. Cf. c. 21. 11.—5.

au)toi/: opp. to the former guards. See on i. 100. 14.—

e)fu/lasson mhde/na . . . e)pibohqei=n: cf. vii. 17. 5; also ii. 69. 4 fulakh\n ei)=xe mh/t) e)kplei=n. The const., mh/ with inf., is the same as with kwlu/ein.—6. kai/: also. It was not deemed sufficient simply to guard the passages of the towers. —7.

plei/ous: several, a number, as in c. 22. 21, or possibly, more, sc. than those that guarded the passages below.—8.

kai\ ka/twqen kai\ a)/nwqen: belongs to ei)=rgon, not to e)pibohqou=ntas, and, with a reference to ta\s dio/dous fula/ssontes, as well as to e)panabiba/santes, more fully explains a)po\ tw=n pu/rgwn. Kr. explains, ‘they kept back from the towers the advancing foe, shooting at them from below and from above.’ 9.

oi( de/: i.e. those still at the foot of the wall; oi( plei/ous being appos., as in viii. 80. 13, but not restrictive, as in ii. 4. 19.—

prosqe/ntes: sc. tw=| tei/xei.—10. a(/ma: connects prosqe/ntes closely with a)pw/santes.— 11. u(pere/bainon: includes, acc. to what follows, also the erossing of the outer ditch.

o( de\ diakomizo/menos ai)ei\ i(/stato: always as one came over he halted. ai)ei/ belongs not only to the iterative partic: o( diakomizo/menos (=o(po/te tis diakomi/zoito), but also to i(/stato,—hence its position. Kr. Spr. 50, 10, 5. See on i. 2. 4. The pl. idea implied in this clause finds expression in the verbs that follow.—

e)pi\ tou= xei/lous th=s ta/frou: i.e. the outer ditch (c. 24. 13), to be distinguished from the inner mentioned c. 22. 4. With xei=los, bank, cf. labrum fossae, Liv. xxxvii. 37.—13.

para\ to\ tei=xos: by the side of the wall.—

kwluth\s gi/gnoito th=s diaba/sews: = kwlu/oi th\n dia/basin. See on c. 2. 11.

pa/ntes: sc. except those still on the two towers.—15.

xalepw=s oi( teleutai=oi katabai/nontes: parenthetical, the last descending with difficulty. oi( teleutai=oi is in part. appos. to oi( a)po\ tw=n pu/rgwn, as i. 119. 5; ii. 54. 4. Of the smaller detachment (=oi( a)po\ tw=n pu/rgwn = oi( me/n, l. 7 above), under whose protection the larger division crossed the wall, those who descended last got down with difficulty, being hard pressed doubtless by the enemy, who must have pushed after them through the towers. See Steup, Rh. Mus. xxxiii. p. 255. Arn., Bl., and Jow. take only xalepw=s oi( teleutai=oi as parenthetical.—16.

oi( triako/sioi: cf. c. 22. 33.

ma=llon: more, i.e. better. Cf. h(=sson, —

e)k tou= sko/tous: cf. Xen. Anab. vii. 4. 18 h)ko/ntizon ei)s to\ fw=s e)k tou= sko/tous.—19. ta\ gumna/: i.e. the unprotected parts of the body, as in v. 10. 17; 71. 6. Cf. Liv. xxii. 50 in latus dextrum quod patebat Numidae iacularentur. —20.

dia\ ta\s lampa/das: i.e. the enemy's torches, which lighted only the space just around the bearers.— 22.

biai/ws: hard pressed. Kühn. 497, 5. Cf. ii. 33. 14 biaio/teron a)nagago/menoi, iv. 31. 15 a)naxw/rhsis biaiote/ra, v. 73. 22 a)poxw/rhsis ou) bi/aios.

kru/stallos e)peph/gei: cf. Aesch. Pers. 501 pera=| krustalloph=ga dia\ po/ron, Eur. Rhes. 441 fush/mata krustallo/phkta.—23. e)pelqei=n: diadramei=n, Schol.—24.

oi(=os a)phliw/tou h)\ bore/ou u(datw/dhs ma=llon: such as (is formed) when the wind is east instead of north, rather watery. This interpretation, given by the Schol. and Va., and adopted by Arn., Bl., and Jow., is doubtless the best that can be made out of the text as it stands. For the omission of ma=llon before h)/, which Jow. thinks is softened by its occurrence after u(datw/dhs, Arn. cites Soph. Ajax 966 e)moi\ pikro\s te/qnhken h)\ kei/nois gluku/s. Dobree brackets h)\ bore/ou. Pp. would transpose u(datw/dhs ma=llon, or bracket u(datw/dhs. For the temporal gens., see G. 1136; H. 759; Kühn. 418, 8 b; Kr. Spr. 47, 2, 1. On the form a)phliw/ths, see Lobeck on Soph. Aj. 805. u(datw/dhs occurs only here in Thuc.—

kai\ h( nu\c . . . u(poneifome/nh: and the night with such a wind somewhat snowy (lit. besnowed). A bold and rather poetic use of u(poneifome/nh that seems not to be found elsewhere. Cf. u(pe/neifen, iv. 103. 5. On the form u(poneifome/nh, which most of the best Mss. have, see J. Schmidt, zur Gesch. d. indogerm. Vokalismus i. p. 134; Stahl Qu. Gr.^{2} p. 39. Cobet, ad Hyper. p. 57, prefers u(ponifome/nh. —26.

o(\ mo/lis u(pere/xontes e)peraiw/qhsan: which they crossed scarcely keep- ing (their heads) above. o(/ belongs to both partic. and verb. For u(pere/xein with acc. in fig. sense, cf. Eur. Hipp. 1365.—

e)ge/neto . . . ma=llon: Cl. explains that e)ge/neto is not merely passive of poiei=sqai, but has the stronger meaning of successful accomplishment, as in v. 55. 15; vi. 74. 3; viii. 57. 8. “And their escape was accomplished more, etc.” But cf. vii. 41. 3 th\n kata/feucin e)poiou=nto. The idea of successful accomplishment is inseparable from the expression e)ge/neto h( dia/feucis. dia/feucis, which occurs elsewhere only in late writers, for diafugh/, acc. to Thuc.'s preference for forms in -dis, which appears esp. in connexion with the pass. gi/gnesqai. Cf. c. 92. 16; i. 73. 1; 75. 14; ii. 11. 17; 14. 7; 94. 2; iv. 74. 18; 85. 1; 113. 1; 116. 10; v. 82. 18; vi. 103. 17; vii. 42. 7; viii. 21. 2; 66. 9; 89. 26; 97. 13. On Thuc.'s use of verbal nouns in -dis, see Introd. to Book I. p. 49, and Sihler, Trans. Amer. Philol. Assoc. xii. p. 96 ff.—27.

dia\ tou= xeimw=nos to\ me/geqos: for the order, see on i. 32. 8.

212 men, having eluded their pursuers, reach Athens.

to\ tou= *)androkra/tous h(rw=|on: the temenos of the Plataean hero Androcrates, who is mentioned by Plut. Arist. 11, is referred to also by Hdt. ix. 25. 18, and Plut. ibid.—

nomi/zontes . . . e)s tou\s polemi/ous: thinking those would least suspect that they had taken this road, which led to the enemy. The irregularity in the order of words arose from emphasizing sfa=s tau/thn. For the rare verb u(potoph=sai, used by Thuc. elsewhere only in aor. partic., see on i. 20. 9, and for aor. inf. after nomi/zein referring to the future, see note and App. on ii. 3. 9. St. inserts a)/n after h(/kista. GMT. 127; Kühn. 389, N. 8.—5.

th\n pro\s *kiqairw=na kai\ *druo\s kefala/s: through this pass, called by the Athenians, from the wood-covered peaks, *druo\s kefalai/, by the Boeotians, from the three easily distinguishable summits, *trei=s kefalai/ (Hdt. ix. 39. 5), ran one of the three main roads between Boeotia and Attica in a southeasterly direction by Eleutherae. See Vischer, Erinnerungen aus Griechenland, p. 533; Bursian i. p. 249.—7.

meta\ lampa/dwn: cf. c. 23. 17.—

diw/kontas: abs., hastening forward. For the acc. connected with diw/kontas, as well as those with e)xw/- rhsan and h)=|san below, see G. 1057; Kühn. 409, 1, 7.

th\n pro\s to\ o)/ros . . . *(usia/s: this road, which branched off eastward not far from Plataea, is to be distinguished from that which led directly from Thebes to Hysiae, mentioned by Paus. ix. 1. 6 ou) th\n eu)qei=an a)po\ tw=n *qhbw=n th\n pedia/da, th\n de\ e)pi\ *(usia\s pro\s *)eleuqerw=n te kai\ th=s *)attikh=s.—10. e)s *)eru/qras kai\ *(usia/s: the remoter point is mentioned first, for Erythrae was east of Hysiae. Cf. c. 29. 6, and see on ii. 7. 16. For the accent of *)eru/qras, see Eustathius on Hom. B 499 *)eru/qrai me\n baruto/nws ai( th=s *boiwti/as, *)eruqrai\ de o)cuto/nws ai( th=s *)iwni/as.—labo/menoi: having reached, with gen., as in c. 106. 10; viii. 80. 13. G. 1099; H. 739; Kühn. 416, 2. Cf. a)ntilabe/sqai in the same sense c. 22. 1.—12.

a)po\ pleio/nwn: i.e. the 220 mentioned in c. 20. 11. a)po/ as in c. 112. 30; i. 49. 25; 110. 2; vii. 87. 26. Kühn. 414, N. 4.—

ei)si/ tines oi(/: treated as a single subst., some, hence the pres. is retained. G. 1029; H. 998.

kata\ xw/ran e)ge/nonto: returned to their post. Cf. kata\ cullo/gous gi/gnesqai, c. 27. 7; kata\ custa/seis gi/gnesqai, ii. 21. 15; e)n tai=s xw/rais e(/kastoi e)ge/nonto, Xen. Anab. iv. 8. 15. kata\ xw/ran is found elsewhere only with me/nein (c. 22. 30; i. 28. 18; ii. 58. 17; iv. 14. 28; 26. 3; 76. 26; vii. 49. 24; viii. 71. 21; 86. 16).—15.

th=s bohqei/as: see on c. 22. 34.—

oi( e)k th=s po/lews: the proleptic use of e)k caused by the following kh/ruka e)kpe/myantes. See on c. 22. 22.—18.

e)spe/ndonto a)nai/resin toi=s nekroi=s: conative impf. Schol. sponda\s e)zh/toun poih=sai. GMT. 36; Kühn. 382, 6 b. With acc. of thing and dat. of person also c. 109. 10; 114. 11. Kühn. 424, N. 1 b.— 21.

oi( me\n dh\ . . . ou(/tws u(perba/ntes

e)sw/qhsan: cf. c. 20. 12 e)ne/meinan th=| e)co/dw| e)qelontai\ tro/pw| toiw=|de. The fate of the city and of those who remained in it is narrated in c. 52-68.

The beleaguered Mytileneans are encouraged to hold out by the Lacedaemonian Salaethus, who steals into the city.

o( *lakedaimo/nios: the art., suspected by Kr., is protected by c. 100. 11; v. 52. 3; viii. 26. 8; 35. 2. The use of the art. is nowhere more variable than with names of peoples.—

e)s *mutilh/nhn: which was in the condition described c. 18. § 5.—3.

e)s *pu/rran: on the inmost recess of the bay which extends from the west coast deep into the island, whence the distance to Mitylene was shortest.—4.

kata\ xara/dran tina/: i.e. along the dry bed of a torrent. Cf. c. 98. 7; 107. 14; 112. 22.—

h(=| u(pe/rbaton h)=n: if the text be sound, either, as Bl., because the wall of the Athenians had not been completed across the ravine, or, as St., because it was lower there and less carefully guarded. Steup, who assumes that the wall must have been everywhere of the same height—measured from base to top—and hence not easier to cross in the ravine than elsewhere, favors Cl.'s suggestion of an outlet for the water left open in the bed of the torrent, in which case v. Herw.'s conjecture u(p obato/n, for u(perbato/n, would be probable.—5.

dialaqw/n: i.e. la/qra| dielqw/n or u(perba/s. Contrary to the usual const., lanqa/nw takes here the form of the limiting participle. GMT. 893; Kühn. 482, N. 14. —6.

toi=s pro/edrois: prob. the official title of the ruling board under the oligarchical constitution of Mytilene. Cf. viii. 67. 15, where the first five men to be chosen under the constitution proposed by Pisander are called pro/edroi. See Plehn, Lesbos, p. 93.— 7.

ai( tessara/konta nh=es: cf. c. 16. § 3.—8.

proapopemfqh=nai/ te: the particle introduces the third member. For the change from const. with o(/ti to inf., cf. c. 2. 12, 15; 3. 12, 14, and see on i. 87. 11. Kühn. 550, N. 3. —9.

kai\ a(/ma . . . e)pimelhso/menos: for partic. co-ord. with prepositional phrase, cf. c. 34. 17; 42. 23; i. 39. 2; 80. 3; ii. 89. 22.

pro\s tou\s *)aqhnai/ous: Cl. construes with h(=sson ei)=xon th\n gnw/mhn, as v. 44. 7; 48. 10; Xen. Anab. ii 5. 29 (cf. also Thuc. v. 13. 8; 14. 4), they had their mind less turned (were less inclined) to the Athenians, w(/ste cumbai/nein being an explanatory addition. But Steup connects pro\s tou\s *)aqhnai/ous with cumbai/nein, comparing c. 27. 3, in which case the order of words would be as in vii. 86. 12 tou\s ga\r e)k th=s nh/sou a)/ndras tw=n *lakedaimoni/wn o( *niki/as prouqumh/qh . . . w(/ste a)reqh=nai, and w(/ste pleonastic after ei)=xon th\n gnw/mhn, as often after pei/qein (see on c. 31. 10), paraskeua/zein (c. 36. 20), dei=sqai (i. 119. 7), yhfi/zesqai (v. 17. 20; vi. 88. 47), do/can (viii. 79. 2), cugxwrei=sqai (v. 17. 12). Kühn. 473, N. 6. This certainly brings out more clearly the evident sense of the passage.—11.

o(/ te xeimw\n kte(.: only here is this formula for the conclusion of the year introduced by te, and so this winter ended. Generally the connexion is looser: with kai/, as c. 88. 13; ii. 47. 2; 103. 5; iv. 51. 5; 116. 14; 135. 8; v. 39. 18; 51. 10; 56. 19; 81. 10; 83. 20; vi. 7. 24; 93. 20; vii. 18. 32; viii. 6. 32; 60. 16; or with me/n (in resumé), as c. 116. 7; ii. 70. 21. FIFTH YEAR OF THE WAR. cc. 26-88.

The next spring the Peloponnesians send a fleet to succour Mytilene, and make at the same time a fourth invasion of Attica.

oi( *peloponnh/sioi . . . au)toi\ kai\ oi( cu/mmaxoi: see on c. 1. 4. 2. [

du/o kai\ tessara/konta]: Cl. explains that here, where the actual sending of the expedition is described, the exact number is given instead of the round number forty used elsewhere in the account (c. 16. 16; 25. 7; 29. 1; 69. 1). Arn. thinks the two additional ships may have been the Spartan contingent, which in such expeditions was always small. Cf. viii. 6. 31. Steup brackets the words. See App.—3.

a)/rxonta: for e)/xonta of the Mss. See App.—

o(\s h)=n au)toi=s nau/arxos: cf. c. 16. 17. Here, as ii. 66. 6; 80. 12, the nauarchy extends from the summer of one year to the next.—5.

o(/pws . . . e)pibohqh/sousin: the reason why the invasion was made exactly then, not earlier nor later. Cf. § 4 and c. 25. 6 o(/ti e)sbolh/ te . . . pare/sontai.—a)mfote/rwqen qorubou/menoi: i.e. not only threatened by the fleet sailing to Lesbos, but actually attacked by a land force in Attica. —6.

h(=sson: i.e. less than they could but for the invasion then made into Attica, against which part of the Athenian forces would be engaged. The Spartan government did not anticipate, of course, that in consequence of the slowness and cowardice of Alcidas the Athenians would hear of the fall of Mytilene soon after they heard of the sailing of Alcidas, and so would not need to send thither any more ships. Cf. c. 29. § 1.—

tai=s nausi\n e)s th\n *mutilh/nhn katapleou/sais e)pibohqh/sousin: the sense of the whole final clause seems to be, “that the Athenians embarrassed both by sea and land might the less with their ships sail to Mytilene and bring aid” (lit. with their ships sailing to Mytilene bring aid). So St. explains (Goett. Gel. Anz. 1882, p. 97), taking the dat. as instrumental. The text is generally interpreted, “that the Athenians might the less advance against the ships sailing to Mytilene.” But e)pibohqei=n tini means always, if the dat. is not instrumental, hasten to the aid of (cf. i. 73. 24; iv. 1. 11; 29. 23; 43. 15; Hdt. vii. 207. 9; viii. 1. 12; 14. 5); besides, to make katapleou/sais attrib. would require either that nausi/n follow e)s th\n *mutilh/nhn, or that the article be repeated after nausi/n. Steup brackets katapleou/sais. See App. kataplei=n does not differ essentially from the simple verb, as also in i. 51. 13; ii. 103. 3; iv. 26. 20; viii. 35. 4; 108. 1. e)pibohqh/sousin, with the best Mss., instead of e)pibohqh/swsin. GMT. 324; H. 881. c.

h(gei=to th=s e)sbolh=s tau/ths: cf. ii. 10. 9.—

*kleome/nhs u(pe\r *pausani/ou: ou(=tos o( *kleome/nhs kai\ o( *pleistoa/nac pai=de/s ei)si *pausani/ou tou= e)n *plataia=sin a)risteu/santos e)pi\ tw=n *mh/dwn, Schol. See on i. 94. 1; 114. 11. Archidamus, who had led the previous invasions, was prob. still alive, but hindered by illness. His death must have occurred soon after, for his son Agis, as king, leads the expedition of the following year, c. 80. 3. See Kr. Hist.-phil. Stud. i. p. 151. Elsewhere, in narrating Peloponnesian invasions of Attica, Thuc. always adds the father's name to that of the leader (c. 1. 3; i. 114. 11; ii. 19. 6; 47. 6; iv. 2. 3; vii. 19. 3—cf. also c. 89. 3; ii. 71. 3). But everywhere else a Spartan king is the leader. The present passage differs, it is true, also from i. 107. 6, where in the account of the expedition into central Greece, which led to the battle of Tanagra, it is said, *nikomh/dous tou= *kleombro/tou u(pe\r *pleistoa/naktos tou= *pausani/ou basile/ws, ne/ou o)/ntos e)/ti, h(goume/nou. Still one is less inclined to accept, with G. Osberger (Festgruss f. Heerwagen, p. 89 f.), the loss of o( *pausani/ou before u(pe\r *pausani/ou, since the absence of *lakedaimoni/wn with basile/ws is also unusual. In i. 107. 6, oi( *lakedaimo/nioi occurs as subj. 8.

u(pe/r: in place of. Kühn. 435, i. 2 a. —

ui(e/os: this form of gen. also i. 13. 26; 137. 2; ii. 100. 14; ui(ou=, v. 16. 24. See on i. 13. 26.—9.

newte/rou e)/ti: yet too young, sc. to rule. Cf. vi. 12. 10 new/teros e)/ti w)\n e)s to\ a)/rxein.— patro\s de/: see App. [

kai/]: see App.—11.

o(/sa . . . parele/leipto: cf. ii. 57. 8, where, in the account of the second invasion, th\n gh=n pa=san e)/temon must mean, ravaged all parts of the land, not every point. paralei/pein, spare, as in ii. 13. 7. —13.

meta\ th\n deute/ran: cf. ii. 57. § 2. —

e)pime/nontes . . . ti peu/sesqai: for the const. with inf., see on c. 2. 7; 12. 11.—14.

w(s h)/dh peperaiwme/nwn: as was natural to assume, since the fleet was expected to make all haste (c. 29. 2), instead of proceeding with the utmost slowness, as it did (c. 27. 2; 29. 3). For const. of the partic., see on c. 4. 15.—15.

e)pech=lqon: abs., they went forward, as i. 62. 24. Cf. Plato Gorg. 492 d. Bm. takes ta\ polla\ with e)pech=lqon, comparing c. 67. 1 tau=ta e)pech/lqomen (used fig.), and ii. 94. 13 katadramo/ntes th=s *salami=nos ta\ polla/.—16. e)peleloi/pei o( si=tos: i.e. the corn brought with them. Cf. c. 1. 8; ii. 10. 4; 23. 11.—17.

a)nexw/rhsan kai\ dielu/qhsan kata\ po/leis: for the formula, see on c. 1. 9.

28. In Mytilene the democratic party comes into power, whereupon the authorities surrender the city to Paches, on condition that the fate of the Mytileneans should be decided by the Athenians.

w(s . . . a)po\ th=s *peloponnh/sou: as Salaethus had promised, c. 25. 7. —2.

e)nexro/nizon: only here in Thuc., as e)ndiatri/bein, c. 29. 3; v. 12. 6; vii. 81. 20.—3.

e)peleloi/pei: not entirely, as may be inferred from l. 8 below. —

cumbai/nein pro\s tou\s *)aqhnai/ous: for the const., see Kühn. 441, iii. 1 b. See on c. 25. 10.

o(pli/zei: i.e. he gives them full hoplite armour (viii. 25. 4), which hitherto the dunatoi/ had reserved to themselves, the lower classes of citizens serving as yiloi/, with spear or bow, without breastplate and shield.

tw=n a)rxo/ntwn: = tw=n e)n toi=s pra/gmasi (c. 28. 1).

kata\ cullo/gous gigno/menoi: i.e. coming together in secret party meetings. So Xen. Anab. v. 7. 1 kai\ cu/llogoi e)gi/gnonto kai\ ku/kloi cuni/stanto, and Arr. Anab. v. 25. 2. Cf. kata\ custa/seis gigno/menoi, ii. 21. 15; and see on c. 24. 14. —8.

to\n si=ton: the dunatoi/ seem to have anticipated the lack of provisions, either by retaining for themselves the corn, which before the revolt had been ordered from the Pontus (cf. c. 2. 7, and see W. Herbst, Der Abfall Mytilenes, p. 11), or, if we suppose, with Steup, that this never arrived, by taking other precautions. —

tou\s dunatou/s: i.e. the optimates or o)li/goi, as i. 24. 13; ii. 65. 8; v. 4. 8; viii. 21. 4.—9.

au)toi/: for themselves alone, as i. 139. 15; v. 60. 4; vi. 37. 3. Cf. c. 28. 2 ei) a)pomonwqh/sontai th=s cumba/sews. au)toi/ belongs with cugxwrh/santes paradw/sein.—cugxwrh/santes pro\s *)aqhnai/ous: as ii. 59. 6. Cf. c. 28. 3; v. 29. 21; vii. 82. 7. See on l. 3; 25. 10.

1.

oi( e)n toi=s pra/gmasin: as in Dem. ix. 56; Arist. Polit. v. 7. 12, <*> oi( a)/rxontes, oi( dunatoi/, c. 27. 7, 8, whose executive committee perhaps were the pro/edroi of c. 25. 6. Cf. oi( e)pi\ toi=s pra/gmasi, Dem. ix, 2, and oi( e)/xontes ta\ pra/gmata, c. 62. 11; 72. 3. See on c. 11. 11, and W. Herbst l.c. —

ou)/te, te: on the correlation see Kühn. 536, 3 a.—

a)pokwlu/sein: for fut. inf. limiting dunatoi\ o)/ntes, see on i. 27. 9; ii. 29. 26; vi. 6. 4. GMT. 113; Kühn. 389, N. 8. St. writes a)pokwlu/ein. See Qu. Gr.^{2} p. 18 sqq.— 2.

dunatoi\ o)/ntes: depends on gno/ntes. GMT. 904.—

ei) a)pomonwqh/sontai: in accordance with the threat contained in au)toi/, c. 27. 9.—3.

kinduneu/sontes: still dependent on gno/ntes. The pres., kinduneu/ontes, which several good Mss. have, is doubtless only a slip of the copyist due to the preceding o)/ntes.— koinh=|: i.e. together with the democratic party. Cf. v. 32. 16; 35. 11; 42. 19.—

pro/s te *pa/xhta kai\ to\ strato/pedon: for the const., see on c. 25. 10; 27. 3, 9. Paches doubtless conferred with the most prominent of his officers. The Athenian army could settle only the preliminaries, the final decision belonging to the demos at Athens. to\ strato/pedon is tacitly opp. to po/lis, as in viii. 72. 2; 76. 3.—4.

w(/ste: on condition that, as in See on i. 28. 18. GMT. 587, 2; H. 953 b.—5.

bouleu=sai: aor., to decide, as in i. 85. 5; 132. 28; ii. 6. 10; iv. 41. 1; vi. 39. 5; pres., to deliberate (i. 97. 2; iv. 15. 3), except in c. 42. 25, give advice.—7.

presbei/an de\ . . . *mutilhnai/ous: the natural const. would be *mutilhnai/ous de\ presbei/an a)poste/llein, but the interposition of kai\ th\n stratia\n . . . au)tou/s led to a change of const. a)poste/llein depends on e)cei=nai in spite of the intervening clause.—8.

e)n o(/sw| a)\n pa/lin e)/lqwsi: this concise expression is really a mixture of e)n o(/sw| a)\n a)pw=si (cf. viii. 87. 8) and pri\n a)\n (or e(/ws a)/n, i. 90. 20) pa/lin e)/lqwsin (cf. i. 91. 10). See also i. 14. 12 for similar su/gxusis. e)n o(/sw|, until, also c. 52. 16.

oi( pra/cantes pro\s tou\s *lakedaimoni/ous: for the const. (pro/s, with), see on c. 4. 20; i. 131. 7; ii. 5. 32. —12.

ou)k h)ne/sxonto: abs., could not keep quiet, as v. 45. 17. On the augments, see G. 544; H. 361 a. —13.

o(/mws: i.e. notwithstanding safety had been guaranteed them until the return of their embassy. For similar breviloquentia, cf. c. 49. 3; 80. 4; i. 105. 24; ii. 51. 24; iv. 96. 35.—

kaqi/zousi: sc. i(ke/tai, which is expressed c. 70. 18; 75. 22; i. 24. 19; 126. 32. i(ke/tai is omitted also c. 75. 15.—14.

katati/qetai: places for safe-keeping. The mid. always in this sense. See on i. 115. 13.—15.

me/xri ou(=: with subjv. with out a)/n also iv. 16. 16; 41. 2; 46. 12. GMT. 620; Kühn. 398, N. 2. See on i. 137. 13, and St. Qu. Gr.^{2} p. 26.— 16.

prosekth/sato: sc. au)th/n. Antissa had resisted the Methymneans, as described in c. 18. § 2.—

kai\ ta)=lla . . . h(=| au)tw=| e)do/kei: and arranged the other matters pertaining to the army as he deemed best. Cf. c. 35. 7; i. 95. 8; ii. 6. 3.

Seven days later the Peloponnesian fleet arrives in that region.

e)/dei e)n ta/xei paragene/sqai: contrasted with ple/ontes . . . komisqe/ntes, not without irony, a trace of which is observable also elsewhere, when allusion is made to naval operations of the Peloponnesians. See on c. 31. 11; 81. 1; ii. 7. 9; 93. 20.—3.

e)ndie/triyan: see App.—4.

sxolai=oi komisqe/ntes: cf. xro/nioi cunio/ntes, i. 141. 30. For other cases of the pred. adj. used adv., see on i. 12. 3. G. 926; H. 619; Kr. Spr. 57, 5, 4.—

tou\s e)k th=s po/lews *)aqhnai/ous: understood by Cl., St., and Bm., with L. Herbst (Philol. xvi. p. 312 f.—cf. xlii. p. 696 ff.), to be the crew of the 100 ships mentioned c. 16. 5, made up from the citizen classes (and metics). Cf. c. 91. 11; i. 105. 19; ii. 31. 6; iv. 28. 18; 77. 2. But Steup is prob. right in understanding here, with Müller-Strübing (Thuk. Forsch. p. 117 ff.), those in Athens and Attica, as opp. to those that had been sent to Lesbos. For the fleet of Alcidas was not despatched till the summer of 427 B.C.; otherwise Thuc. could not have delayed mention of it till c. 26. § 1, and Salaethus, who departed from Sparta tou= au)tou= xeimw=nos teleutw=ntos (c. 25. 1), could not have said proapopemfqh=nai au)to/s (c. 25. 8). Besides, the return of the 100 Attie ships, which is mentioned c. 16. 18, certainly occurred before Paches was despatched to Mytilene (c. 18. 15). See Müller-Strübing ibid. p. 120. and Jow. ad loc. Further, in three at least of the passages cited by Herbst (c. 91. 11; i. 105. 19; ii. 31. 6), oi( e)k th=s po/lews seems to mean, as here, simply those left in Athens and Attica, as opp. to those sent abroad.— 5.

pri\n dh\ th=| *dh/lw| e)/sxon: until they reached Delos, having thus accomplished the part of the voyage in which there was most danger of being sighted by Athenian ships. For pri/n with indic., see on i. 51. 5; 118. 13; 132. 28; and Gildersleeve, Am. J. of Ph. ii. p. 469. GMT. 635; H. 924. sxei=n with dat. also c. 33. 5; vii. 1. 14; elsewhere with e)s or kata/ with acc. Kr. Spr. 48, 1, 2; Kühn. 423, 5. See on vii. 1. 14.—6.

th=| *)ika/rw| kai\ *muko/nw|: the reverse of the geographical order, as in c. 102. 4; ii. 7. 16; 77. 10; 93. 1; viii. 88. 10; 108. 3. The place where they first received the news of the fall of Mytilene is named first, and punqa/nesqai prw=ton belongs with this; hence Haase's conjecture (Lucubr. Thuc. p. 23), *pa/rw|, is unnecessary.

to\ safe/s: the exact situation. Cf. l. 10; i. 22. 16; vi. 60. 12, 20.— 8.

*)/embaton: to\ steno\n to\ metacu\ *xi/ou kai\ *)eruqra=s [for *)eruqrw=n], Schol. More correctly Steph. Thes. s.v. to/pos th=s *)eruqrai/as.—9. th=| *mutilh/nh| e(alwkui/a|: the dat. to express the terminus a quo, as tau/th| in i. 13. 14. It was about seven days after the fall of Mytilene when etc. Kühn. 423, 25 f. Kr. Spr. 48, 5, 3. The pred. partic. has the same force as in e)pilipo/nti, c. 20. 3.—11.

e)k tw=n paro/ntwn: under present circumstances. e)k as in iv. 17. 4; v. 40. 19; 87. 2; vi. 70. 18; 93. 10; vii. 62. 4; 77. 1. Kr. Spr. 68, 17, 10; Kühn. 430, 2, 3 g. Different is bouleu/esqai peri\ tw=n paro/ntwn, i. 79. 4.

But Teutiaplus the Elean advises to make without delay a night attack on Mytilene.

e)moi\ dokei=n plei=n h(ma=s: unusual change of subj., as in iv. 118. 2; vi. 22. 1. For the usual const., cf. i. 31. 9; iv. 15. 2; 71. 6; v. 53. 5; vii. 4. 15; 74. 3.—3.

pri\n e)kpu/stous gene/sqai: as in iv. 70. 14; viii. 42. 2. This expression is used of persons also by Dio C. xli. 44; xlviii. 39; elsewhere of things. Cf. katagge/ltous gi/gnesqai, vii. 48. 6; e)ca/ggeltoi gene/sqai, viii. 14. 2; e)pa/i+stos e)ge/neto, Hdt. ii. 119. 10.—

w(/sper e)/xomen: just as we are, i.e. without delay. See on i. 134. 14.

a)ndrw=n: grammatically dependent on to\ a)fu/lakton, in the loose connexion which is close akin to the gen. abs., on the part of men who—. —

polu\ to\ a)fu/lakton eu(rh/somen: for similar const., cf. viii. 66. 18 h)\ ga\r a)gnw=ta a)\n eu(=ren w(=| e)rei= h)\ gnw/rimon a)/piston. polu/ is pred. with the same position and effect as e)laxi/stas, i. 34. 10; a)/mikta, i. 77. 24. The use of a neut. partic. or adj. for an abstract noun is common in Thuc. It presents to the mind the abstract quality in operation. See on i. 36. 3. GMT. 829 a; H. 966 b; Kühn. 403 g. —5. kai\ pa/nu: vel maxime, as c. 93. 10; i. 3. 5; ii. 11. 26; 51. 6; 65. 61; vi. 17. 32.—6.

a)ne/lpistoi: active, as also vi. 17. 31; viii. 1. 15; and to\ a)ne/lpiston, ii. 51. 13; elsewhere in Thuc. with passive force, iv. 55. 8; vi. 33. 24.—

e)pigene/sqai: of unexpected attack, as c. 108. 3; iv. 25. 52; 93. 12; vii. 32. 12.—7.

h(mw=n h( a)lkh\ tugxa/nei ma/lista ou)=sa: “and where defence happens to be chiefly our role.” This interpretation of Junghan's (N. Jahrbb. cxix. p. 358) is adopted by Steup. See also Amer. J. of Phil. x. p. 210, where the same explanation is given by C. F. Smith, independently of Junghahn. Cl. follows Herbst (Philol. xvi. p. 305), “where our strength at present chiefly lies.” a)lkh/ as in c. 108. 5; ii. 84. 24; Hdt. ii. 45. 7; iii. 78. 5; iv. 125. 21; ix. 102. 18. On Thuc.'s use of a)lkh/, see Diener, De Sermone Thuc. p. 12, and C. F. Smith, Proc. Amer. Philol. Assoc. vol. xxii. p. xvii.—

ei)ko\s de\ kai\ to\ pezo/n: opp. to kata\ me\n qa/lassan kai\ pa/nu.—8. w(s kekrathko/twn: “in the confidence of victory.”

e)lpi/zw: with inf. (pres. or aor.) and a)/n = think or expect. Cf. i. 127. 5; ii. 20. 4; v. 39. 5; vii. 61. 12, and a)ne/lpistoi e)pigene/sqai a)/n above. Cf. Chaucer, Reeve's Tale, 1. 109, ‘I hope he wil be deed.’—

meta\ tw=n e)/ndon: in agreement with those within (cf. v. 44. 2; vi. 28. 11), as if an act. inf. clause were to follow; but the interposition of the ei) clause has caused a slight anacoluthon. For katalamba/nein ta\ pra/gmata, see on c. 11. 10. —

ei)/ tis a)/ra . . . eu)/nous: intended not to express doubt, but to be as comprehensive as possible, whoever is left well-disposed toward us. For a)/ra, see on c. 56. 15.

a)poknh/swmen to\n ki/ndunon: see on c. 20. 10.—

nomi/santes ou)k a)/llo ti ei)=nai: this const. with nomi/zein or h(gei=sqai gives to an ambiguous expression a definite, and, in the view of the speaker, correct sense. This is the case with e(orth/, i. 70. 29; to\ cumfe/ron, c. 56. 25; and here with the proverbial or formulary expression, to\ koino\n tou= pole/mou. See App. —13.

to\ toiou=ton: i.e. lack of precaution.—

o(\ ei)/ tis strathgo\s . . . plei=st) a)\n o)rqoi=to: which, if a general both guard against in himself, and when he sees it in the enemy attacks, he would be most likely to succeed. Cf. v. 9. § 4.—14.

toi=s polemi/ois: belongs both to e)norw=n and e)pixeiroi/h, but o(/, which is obj. of fula/ssoito in the first clause, belongs only to e)norw=n in the second.— 15.

plei=st) a)\n o)rqoi=to: cf. c. 37. 26; 42. 20; v. 9. 14.

But Alcidas decides, in spite of the remonstrances of the Ionian fugitives and of those Lesbians who are present, to return to Peloponnesus.

tosau=ta: occurs esp. after short speeches, “so much and no more.” Cf. c. 52. 13; ii. 12. 1; 72. 1, 13; iv. 11. 1; vii. 49. 1; also c. 62. 25, and Plato Prot. 318 a tosou=tos o( h(me/teros lo/gos.—2. a)/lloi tine/s: epexegetically explained by tw=n a)p) *)iwni/as . . . cumple/ontes. For the part. gen., tw=n . . . fuga/dwn, cf. iv. 78. 17. These fugitives are mentioned only here. —3.

oi( cumple/ontes: oi( rightly added by Madvig (Adv. i. p. 315); for the Lesbians on the fleet, not the Lesbians in general, must be meant. Herbst (Philol. xlii. p. 704) justifies the vulgate by assuming oi( *le/sbioi to be the ambassadors at Olympia, c. 8 ff. But oi( *le/sbioi, though a sufficiently explicit designation for this embassy in c. 16. 10, by no means suffices here, after the narration of so many different events, among them the fall of Mytilene, esp. as the sending of a second later embassy is mentioned, c. 5. 16. Prob. the majority of both embassies were with Alcidas; but some representatives of Mytilenean interests must have remained at Sparta.—5.

o(/pws . . . a)posth/swsin: aor. subjv. after o(/pws, as c. 49. 6; 81. 4; v. 85. 3. GMT. 318.—

o(rmw/menoi: o(rmhth/rion e)/xontes, Schol. Cf. c. 85. 7; i. 64. 10; 90. 12; iv. 8. 36; 52. 16.—6.

ou)deni/: sc. tw=n kata\ tau/thn th\n qa/lassan *(ellh/nwn.—a)kousi/ws: unwelcome, unwished for; the passive force, which the adj. a)kou/sios also has.—7.

kai\ th\n pro/sodon . . . gi/gnhtai: kai/ connects a)posth/- swsin and gi/gnhtai. On the text, see App.—8.

u(fe/lwsi: (so with Laur. and other Mss., not a)fe/lwsi, which Vat. and others have) of gradual withdrawal, as c. 13. 33; 82. 17. —

kai\ a(/ma: also at the same time. See on c. 16. 12; 21. 10.—

h)\n e)formw=si sfi/sin: second condition depending on kai\ (o(/pws) au)toi=s (i.e. toi=s *)aqhnai/ois, dapa/nh gi/gnhtai. The subj. of e)formw=si is the Athenians; sfi/sin refers to the Peloponnesians. e)formei=n with dat. as in vii. 3. 21; 12. 18; the pass. in i. 142. 19; viii. 20. 3.— 9.

*pissou/qnhn: satrap of Lydia. Cf. i. 115. 17.—10.

w(/ste: pleonastic after pei/sein, as in c. 66. 9; 70. 21; 75. 4; 100. 4; 102. 22; ii. 2. 23; v. 16. 23; 35. 31; viii. 45. 21. GMT. 588; Kühn. 473, N. 6.

e)nede/xeto: impf. corresponding to parh/|noun (l.3). e)nde/xesqai in this sense also viii. 50. 2.—11.

to\ plei=ston th=s gnw/mhs ei)=xen: he was for the most part of the opinion. There is a touch of irony in the expression. See on c. 29. 2. Cf. iv. 34. 5 tou= qarsei=n to\ plei=ston ei)lhfo/tes, Hdt. i. 120. 19 tau/th| plei=stos gnw/mhn ei)mi/, v. 126. 2 au)tw=| de\ *)aristago/rh| h( plei/sth gnw/mh h)=n, vii. 220. 5 tau/th| kai\ ma=llon th=| gnw/mh| plei=sto/s ei)mi.—th=s *mutilh/nhs: short for th=s a(lw/sews th=s *mutilh/nhs. —12.

u(sterh/kei: with gen., as in Xen. Anab. i. 7. 12; Ages. 2. 1; Hdt. vi. 89. 12. Cf. Dem. iv. 32, 35. G. 1120; H. 749.

Alcidas sails along the coast of Asia Minor as far as Ephesus. His barbarous treatment of captives.

pare/plei: i.e. southward.—

prossxw/n: see App. on i. 15. 3.— 2.

*muonnh/sw|: Myonnesus promunturium inter Teum Samumque est, Liv. xxxvii. 27. Cf. Strabo, p. 643 (end), h( *muo/nnhsos e)f) u(/yous xerronhsi/zontos katoikei=tai.— kata\ plou=n: without art., as in vii. 31. 14, corresponding to kaq) o(do/n, ii. 5. 3; v. 3. 14; 37. 6. Cf. e)n plw=|. vi. 34. 61.—3.

a)pe/sface: as, acc. to ii. 67. § 4, the custom of the Lacedaemonians was.—

tou\s pollou/s: part. apposition. G. 914; H. 624 d; Kr. Spr. 57, 8, N. Cf. i. 18. 2.

e)s th\n *)/efeson kaqormisame/nou: cf. iv. 45. 3; vi. 97. 5; viii. 34. 11; 42. 20. Müller-Strübing (Thuk. Forsch. p. 128 ff.) denies the possibility of Alcidas having anchored at Ephesus, a city belonging to the Athenian alliance, and holds both *)/efeson here and *)efe/sou in c. 33. 1 to be corrupt. But it seems, acc. to Strabo, p. 641 c, that at that time the harbour of Ephesus could not be closed, and so it was improbable that Alcidas could be kept out. See St. Gött. Gel. Anz. 1882, p. 98.—4.

*sami/wn tw=n e)c *)anai/wn: see on c. 19. 8.—5.

th\n *(ella/da e)leuqerou=n: this claim of Sparta occurs often. See on c. 13. 35; i. 69. 8.—6.

ei) . . . die/fqeiren: the fact expressed in hypothetical form, in tone of reproach. Cf. c. 43. 19; 55. 7; i. 33. 8; 76. 8; 86. 4; iv. 85. 4.—

xei=ras a)ntairome/nous: cf. Hdt. vii. 209. 19.—7.

u(p) a)na/gkhs: only here in Thuc. (but freq. in the poets; see Steph. Thes. s.v.), = e)c a)na/gkhs, c. 40. 9; vi. 44. 5; vii. 27. 17. Cf. u(po\ spoudh=s, c. 33. 12.—9.

prosa/cesqai: will bring over, as in c. 91. 7; i. 99. 8; ii. 30. 7; iv. 86. 3; vi. 22. 4; vii. 7. 8.

o(rw=ntes . . . parabalei=n: on the relation and position of these words, see App.—13.

e)lpi/da ou)de\ th\n e)laxi/sthn ei)=xon mh/ pote . . . parabalei=n: e)lpi/da, expectation, as in ii. 64. 6; 85. 16; 102. 21; vi. 87. 18; vii. 61. 8. For mh/ with inf., as after a verb of denial, see GMT. 807; H. 1029; Kühn. 516, 3 a. So after a)pistei=n, i. 10. 3; ii. 101. 3; vi. 49. 13; a)pisti/a, c. 75. 18; a)pori/a, ii. 49. 25. Cf. also ii. 93. 14. See on vii. 6. 19.—15.

e)s *)iwni/an parabalei=n: cross over to Ionia. parabalei=n intr., as in Hdt. vii. 179. 3; Dem. xii. 16. So diaba/llein, ii. 83. 16. Kühn. 373, 2 a. Cl. rather favours Heilmann's explanation, risk themselves thither, like e)s *)iwni/an parakinduneu/ein, c. 36. 11, and paraba/llesqai, risk (as at play), i. 133. 11; ii. 44. 16; Hom. i 322; to\n ki/ndunon paraba/llesqai, c. 14. 4; plei/w paraba/llesqai, c. 65. 12; pro/qumos h)=n paraba/llesqai kai\ parakinduneu/ein, Polyb. iii. 90. 6; parabo/lws peraiwqei/s, Polyb. i. 11. 9. Cf. parati/qesqai, Hom. b 237; g 74; i 255. Though the uni versality of the thought implied in mh/ pote makes it likely that parabalei=n is fut., the aor. after e)lpi/s is not uncommon, c. 3. 14; ii. 80. 10; v. 9. 27; vi. 87. 18.

Alcidas flees through the open sea back toward Peloponnesus, pursued in vain as far as Patmos by Paches.

fugh\n e)poiei=to: cf. e)poiei=to th\n di/wcin, l. 13; Lat. fugam facere. For this favourite form of periphrasis in Thuc., see on i. 50. 8.—

w)/fqh: had been seen, sc. in the voyage from Embaton to Ephesus, as e)/ti shows; with which agrees the position of Clarus on the coast of Colophon, a few miles northwest of Ephesus. Cf. Strabo, p. 642 to\ pro\ *kolofw=nos a)/lsos tou= *klari/ou *)apo/llwnos. After leaving Ephesus he crossed the open sea, touching nowhere. For the further account of his voyage, cf. c. 69. § 1. —

th=s *salamini/as kai\ *para/lou: the two swift Athenian state triremes kept always manned ready for extraordinary occasions and purposes. Cf. c. 77. 12; vi. 53. 1; 61. 20; viii. 73. 25; 74. 1. See Dict. Ant.; Boeckh, P. E. pp. 235, 334, 702. 3.

ai( d' a)p) *)aqhnw=n ple/ousai: they were prob. sent out after news of Alcidas's expedition was received at Athens, to reconnoitre and take orders to Paches.—4.

th\n di/wcin: sc. of the Attic fleet after it should have heard of the Peloponnesian fleet.—

e)/plei dia\ tou= pela/gous: see on c. 4. 20. This is a strengthened repetition of e)/plei kata\ ta/xos, after the parenthetical clause (w)/fqh . . . ple/ousai) stating the cause of the haste.—5.

w(s gh=| e(kou/sios ou) sxh/swn: determined not of his accord to put to land. For sxei=n with dat., see on c. 29. 5.

tw=| *pa/xhti kai\ toi=s *)aqhnai/ois: with these dats. the three clauses, that follow in inverse order of importance, are to be closely connected. The clause a)teixi/stou ga\r . . . ta\s po/leis, which gives the ground of pantaxo/qen, being set off from the main sent., the increasing importance of the news that comes to Paches is apparent: h)=lqe me/n, the first fleeting rumour; a)fiknei=to de\ kai\ pantaxo/qen, of repeated urgent messages; au)ta/ggeloi e)/frasan, report based upon personal observation and giving exact details (e)/frasan as in i. 145. 4). The reference of au)to/n to Alcidas becomes easier now through this closer connexion of the last clause with the two first.—9.

kai\ w(/s: even thus, i.e. although the condition of Ionia (a)teixi/stou kte(.) was a temptation. kai\ w(/s also i. 44. 11; vii. 74. 2; 81. 30; viii. 51. 10; 56. 10; 87. 18. Jow. suggests “in any case,” as in i. 44. 10 e)do/kei ga\r o( pro\s *peloponnhsi/ous po/lemos kai\ w(\s e)/sesqai au)toi=s, viii. 51. 9 kai\ oi( me\n teixismo/n te pareskeua/zonto, kai\ e)k tou= toiou/tou, kai\ w(\s me/llousa, *sa/mos qa=sson e)teixi/sqh.— 10. a(/ma: connects porqw=sin prospi/ptontes with paraple/ontes. “They might in passing take advantage of the opportunity to plunder the cities.”—11.

au)ta/ggeloi: as in Plut. Ant. 71; Cat. Maj. 14; Arr. Anab. iv. 2. § 6; in the sense, bringing one's own message, Soph. O. C. 333; Phil. 568 (cf. au)to\s a)/ggelos, Phil. 500).

u(po\ spoudh=s: as in v. 66. 9; viii. 107. 1; elsewhere spoudh=|, kata\ spoudh/n, or dia\ spoudh=s. Kühn. 442, Id.—13.

*pa/tmou: the correct form, though against most of the Mss., which have *la/tmou. Latmus is a mountain in Caria, not an island.— 14.

e)pedi/wcen: of eager pursuit, also ii. 79. 27; iv. 43. 17; vii. 23. 11; 41. 5; Hdt. iv. 1. 8; 160. 11.—

w(s d' ou)ke/ti e)n katalh/yei e)fai/neto: when he appeared no longer within reach (lit. catching). As Alcidas is to be understood as the obj. of e)pedi/wcen, so here he is subj. of e)fai/neto. That Dio C. so understood is clear from his close imitation (li. 1.), e)pedi/wcan me\n au)tou/s, e)pei\ d' ou)k e)n katalh/yei e)fai/nonto, a)nexw/rhsan. Pp. takes e)fai/neto impers., as vi. 60. 7 ou)k e)n pau/lh| e)fai/neto. See also Pp. on i. 137. 25.—

e)panexw/rei: turned back again, as in c. 96. 9; 108. 12; i. 63. 14; 131. 5; v. 41. 22; 55. 15; vi. 70. 16; 97. 24.—15.

ke/rdos de\ e)no/misen kte(.: the emphasis is on e)gkatalhfqei=sai. The result of the ships being overtaken at some place is expressed personally by h)nagka/sqhsan and the infs. dependent on it. He thought it fortunate, since he had not come up with them in the open sea, that they had not been hemmed in somewhere and compelled to encamp, and thus give themselves the trouble of watching and blockading them. Such a blockade would have been expensive. See App. on c. 31. 7. Besides, Lesbos was not yet completely subdued (c. 35. § 1).—

metew/rois: Schol. tai=s *)alki/dou nausi/n. mete/wros, in the sense out at sea, freq. in Thuc. (i. 48. 4; ii. 91. 12; iv. 14. 3, etc.), not in Hdt. or Xenophon.—17.

sfi/si: sc. toi=s *)aqhnai/ois, since Paches is to be understood as subj. of e)no/misen. Kr. Spr. 58, 4, 3.—

e)fo/rmhsin: blockade, as ii. 89. 42; viii. 15. 14.

On his return voyage Paches treacherously brings Notium, the port of Colophon, again into subjection to Athens.

pa/lin: with paraple/wn, on the way back.—

*no/tion: the port of Colophon, about two miles from the latter, or a)/nw po/lis (l. 2), acc. to Liv. xxxvii. 26. 5; acc. to Schuchhardt (Mitt. d. deutsch. arch. Inst., Ath. Abth. xi. p. 410) about nine miles. On the events of this chapter, see Ullrich, Beitr. p. 114, A. 130, Boeckh, Staatsh. ii.^{2} p. 699, Wilamowitz, Philol. Unters. i. p. 86 f. The relation of the *notih=s of the Attic tribute-lists to the Colophonian Notium is doubtful, for Hdt. mentions (i. 149. 3) an Aeolian Notium. See Boeckh ibid. p. 712.—2.

katw/|khnto: with adv. designation of place, as ii. 96. 6; 99. 20; v. 83. 13; with acc., i. 120. 8. Thuc, uses the pf. and plpf. always in the mid. (as in the passages just cited); the pres. and aor., only in the active (l. 6; viii. 6. 4; 108. 19).— 3.

*)itama/nous: not otherwise known. He seems to have been the leader of a Persian band who acted without orders from Pissuthnes.—

tw=n barba/rwn kata\ sta/sin i)di/a| e)paxqe/ntwn: here, as often in Thuc., the attrib. partic. is placed after a noun which is attended by other modifiers. See on i. 11. 19; vii. 23. 14; and Merriam, Trans. Amer. Philol. Assoc. xiii. p. 39. i)di/a| for i)di/an of the Mss. is doubtless correctly restores by Kr. As in c. 2. 10, it is to be taken with kata\ sta/sin, “on account of party-discord by one of the factions.” —4.

ma/lista: used with statements of measure, numbers, dates, to imply that the account given is the best possible approximation, though the reality may be more or less. Cf. i. 13. 11; ii. 36. 9.—

o(/te h( deute/ra *peloponnhsi/wn e)sbolh\ . . . e)gi/gneto: sc. in the spring of 430 B.C. Cf. ii. 47. § 1, 2. The impf. of contemporaneous action. Thus is explained why the antiAthenian party in Colophon ventured at this time to revolt; just as the Lesbians made the attempt when the Athenians h)=san tetalaipwrhme/noi u(po/ te th=s no/sou kai\ tou= pole/mou, c. 3. 4.

oi( katafugo/ntes kai\ katoikh/santes au)to/qi: those who had fled for refuge and settled there. For the nom. in part. appos. (oi( me/n, oi( de/, 10), see G. 914; H. 624 d; Kr. Spr. 56, 9, 1.—7.

*pissou/qnou: see on c. 31. 9.—8.

*)arka/dwn: the Areadians appear as mercenaries even in the Persian wars. Cf. Hdt. viii. 26. 2 bi/ou te deo/menoi kai\ e)/nergoi boulo/menoi ei)/nai. Cf. vii. 57. 50.—

e)pagago/menoi: on the form, see App.—9.

e)n diateixi/smati: here and vii. 60. 9, “a space cut off from the rest of the city by an enclosing wall.” Cf. Polyb. viii. 36. 9; xvi. 31. 5, 8; 33. 1; Liv. xxxvii. 11. 10, 11.—

kai\ tw=n . . . e)poli/teuon: supplementary explanation, by which the regular const. (oi( me\n . . . ei)=xon, oi( de\ . . . e)pa/gontai) is interrupted, as in c. 33. 8-11. Among the Colophonians who had left the upper city at the time of the Persian occupation and settled in Notium, a pro-Persian party was again developed, and this, having declared itself by a combination with Pissuthnes, was joined by the original Medizing party in Colophon (cuneselqo/ntes e)poli/teuon). Colophon being thus in the power of the barbarians, the pro-Athenian party had to leave Notium also, but now by treachery and violence on the part of Paches again got the upper hand. Their enemies, oi( mhdi/santes, had to leave Notium, which for security was made an Attic colony.—11.

u(pecelqo/ntes: with acc. only here, as u(poxwrei=n, ii. 88. 11; u(pekfeu/gein, ii. 90. 21; 91. 4; e)canexw/rei ta\ ei)rhme/na, iv. 28. 13. It is intr. iv. 74. 7; vi. 51. 9; viii. 70. 2; 98. 3. Kr. Spr. 46, 6, 8.

tw=n: for to/n of the Mss., since the art. is abs. necessary with *)arka/dwn, while it is not indispensable with a)/rxonta (cf. v. 51. 8; viii. 92. 32).— 13.

w(/ste: see on c. 28. 4.—14.

a)re/skon: for the use of the partic. expressing an adj. notion always in readiness to exert itself, see on i. 38. 8; v. 41. 23; Am. J. of Ph. iv. p. 297.—

katasth/sein: to put back, as in c. 59. 24. For the fut. inf., see GMT. 591, 2.—

sw=n kai\ u(gia=: safe and sound. Similar formulas are salvus et incolumis, salvus et sospes, sain et sauf.—15.

o( me\n e)ch=lqe . . . o( d' e)kei=non . . . ei)=xen: a very striking anacoluthon. The author instead of continuing with e)celqo/nta au)to\n e)n fulakh=| a)de/smw| ei)=xen, proceeds after the interposed clause, w(/ste . . . u(gia=, by a transition in parataxis to const. with finite verb. See on i. 26. 16. Similar anacoluthon iv. 80. 16. Kr. Spr. 56, 9, 3.—

e)n fulakh=| a)de/smw|: in custodiâ liberâ. Cf. Dio C. xxxvi. 36 e)kei=non e)n fulakh=| a)de/smw| ei)=xen, Diod. iv. 46 e)leuqe/ra fulakh/. —16.

tw=| teixi/smati: the diatei/xisma of l. 9, 13.—17.

ou) prosdexome/nwn: sc. tw=n e)/ntos. Gen. abs. without expressed subj., as often in Thuc., when it can easily be supplied from the context. GMT. 848; H. 972 a. See on i. 2. 8.—19.

w(/sper e)spei/sato: cf. Concerning this horrible perfidy, Grote expresses surprise that ‘Thucydides recounts it plainly and calmly, without a single word of comment.’ Cl.'s explanation, that the historian's indignation can be felt in the short, sharp way in which the occurrences are set one over against the other, e)sagagw\n . . . e)peidh\ e)/ndon h)=n . . . cullamba/nei, is, to say the least, not very convincing. Cf. Polyaen. iii. 2.

plh\n tw=n mhdisa/ntwn: i.e. those mentioned in l. 10, who now either returned, or in their turn fuga/des e)ge/nonto.—22. oi)kista/s: as always in Thuc., not the colonists themselves, but those sent out to arrange the government and laws of the colony to be founded. Cf. c. 92. 22; i. 24. 4; 25. 8; iv. 102. 11; vi. 3. 2; 4. 23; 5. 11. The new Notium, whither were recalled all the Colophonians who had become fugitives during the disturbances, received now under Attic ‘oecists’ an Attic constitution, kata\ tou\s e(autw=n no/mous. —23.

katw/|kisan: re-settled, as vi. 5. 16; 48. 13; 76. 7, 9; 84. 6.—

e)k tw=n po/lewn: i.e. from the neighbouring Ionic cities, whither the adherents of the Attic party had fled at the time of the Persian occupation.

After subduing Pyrrha and Eresus, Paches sends the instigators of the revolt of Mytilene as prisoners to Athens.

*pu/rran kai\ *)/ereson: which had sided with Mytilene, c. 18. 5. Antissa had already been reduced (c. 28. 15). —

paresth/sato: reduced, in Thuc. only in aor., serving as causative to prosxwrei=n tini, to submit. See on i. 29. 22.—

*sa/laiqon: cf. c. 25. § 1; 27. § 2.—4.

tou\s e)k th=s *tene/dou: for the proleptic const., see on c. 5. 1.— 5.

ou(\s kate/qeto: acc. to c. 28. 15 this was done me/xri ou)= toi=s *)aqhnai/ois ti do/ch|. In sending the instigators of the revolt to Athens, Paches doubtless obeyed a command received thence.—

kai\ ei)/ tis kte(.: for the conditional clause co-ord. with a case, see Kr. Spr. 59, 2, 4; 60, 10, 1.

th=s stratia=s to\ ple/on: as in c. 36. 22; i. 73. 27; 118. 10.—7.

toi=s loipoi=s: as toi=s leipome/nois, ii. 12. 19. It is construed with u(pome/nwn alone, and is the usual dat. of accompaniment, used chiefly in reference to military forces. G. 1189, 1190; H. 774.—

kaqi/stato: see on c. 28. 17.

The Athenians in the first impulse of their anger adopt the severest measures in regard to the Lesbian prisoners, as well as to all the inhabitants of Mytilene, but the matter is reconsidered in the ecclesia on the following day.

e)/stin a(/: as in ii. 67. 26. G. 1029; H. 998.—3.

parexo/menon: Schol. pra=cai u(pisxnou/menon. Cf. i. 39. 7; iv. 108. 15.—

ta/ t) a)/lla: before kai/, which introduces a definite circumstance, only to emphasize the latter, in which case the use of the art. is regular. “He made various offers and especially—.” Cf. i. 129. 9; 132. 8; iv. 108. 11; v. 46. 21; 52. 12; vi. 8. 7; vii. 65. 6.—

e)/ti ga\r e)poliorkou=nto: cf. c. 20-24; 52. 1.—4.

a)pa/cein: i.e. to effect their withdrawal, as in i. 109. 6; vi. 73. 9.

gnw/mas e)poiou=nto: only here in the sense of deliberated, lit. offered their several views, = gnw/mas sfi/sin au)toi=s prouti/qesan, i. 139. 18. In ii. 2. 24, gnw/mhn poiei=sqai means form a plan; in i. 128. 28; vii. 72. 8, offer a plan.—

e)poiou=nto, kai\ . . . e)/docen: paratactic const., as i. 48. 3; 61. 2. Concerning the decree, cf. Ael. Var. Hist. ii. 9; Diod. xii. 55.—7.

o(/soi h(bw=si: the orig. mood of the decree is retained in indir. discourse. GMT. 689, 2; H. 933; Kühn. 399, 3. 8.

e)pikalou=ntes: construed loosely with e)/docen au)toi=s, as if e)bouleu/santo had preceded. H. 1063; Kr. Spr. 56, 9, 4; Kühn. 493, 1 a. For similar cases of anacoluthon, see on ii. 53. 13.—

th/n te . . . kai\ o(/ti ou)k a)rxo/menoi: Cl. inserts kai/ before o(/ti. St. explains that te is used as if the author had continued, as he seems to have intended, with kai\ o(/ti kte(., or kai\ to\ ta\s *peloponnhsi/wn nau=s tolmh=sai kte(., but after the o(/ti elause the const. is changed to finite verb. For similar changes in const., see on i. 16. 2. Cf. Hdt. i. 85. 5; 129. 4; ii. 44. 5. See App. —10.

proscuneba/leto: this reading of almost all the better Mss. is protected by Thuc.'s usage. The sing. verb before a pl. subj. occasions no difficulty, since ai( nh=es tolmh/sasai = to\ ta\s nau=s tolmh=sai. Cf. iv. 26. 14; viii. 9. 11. proscumba/llesqai, which is used also by Hippoer. 797 e; 807 e, is further protected by the similar use of cumba/llesqai c. 45. 21; Plato Apol. 36 a; Legg. 791 c; Xen. Cyrop. i. 2. 8; Hell. vii. 1. 35. In apparent imitation of the present passage, Arist. says, *)aq. *hol. 19, suneba/lleto de\ ou)k e)la/ttw moi=ran th=s o(rmh=s toi=s *la/kwsin h( pro\s tou\s *)argei/ous toi=s *heisistrati/dais u(pa/rlousa fili/a. Bl. and Kr. read proscunela/bonto (with Laur. and some inferior Mss.), the former citing iv. 47. 3 cunela/bonto de\ tou= toiou/tou ou)x h(/kista, kte(., and Dio C.'s imitation, xliii. 47. 4 prossunela/beto ga\r tou= lo/gou tou/tou, o(/ti kte(.—ou)k e)la/xiston th=s o(rmh=s: = ou)k e)laxi/sthn moi=ran th=s o(rmh=s. Cf. ii. 21. 19, and Arist. l.c. The phrase is to be taken as obj. of proscuneba/leto. Cf. Lys. xxx. 16; Dem. xli. 11. Cf. to\ plei/ston th=s gnw/mhs, c. 31. 11; tou= qarsei=n to\ plei=ston, iv. 34. 5. See on i. 5. 10. Kühn. 416, N. 4. o(rmh/, excitement, impulse. Cf. iv. 4. 4; vii. 71. 32.—11.

e)s *)iwni/an parakinduneu=sai: venture over to Ionia. See on c. 32. 15. parakinduneu/ein also iv. 26. 18. Cf. e)s ta\s *)epipola\s diekindu/neusen, vii. 47. 11. See on i. 63. 3.— 12.

ou)k a)po\ braxei/as dianoi/as: after no slight consideration, i.e. after long premeditation; or, with St. and others, non parvo consilio o)li/gon ou)de\n e)pinoou=ntes (ii. 8. 1). Kr. compares Liban. Basil. 117 d ou)k a)po\ braxei/as gnw/mhs ei)s to\n po/lemon kate/- sthsan. For a)po/ in this sense, see on i. 91. 28; for braxei/a, see on i. 14. 11.

a)/ggelon: pred. to trih/rh, as viii. 106. 18 a)pe/steilan e)s ta\s *)aqh/nas trih/rh a)/ggelon th=s ni/khs.—15. diaxrh/sasqai: to destroy, as i. 126. 37; vi. 61. 17; Hdt. i. 24. 12; 110. 18; Antiph. i. 23; Aeschin. iii. 244; Xen. Mem. iv. 2. 17.

a)nalogismo/s: not re-consideration, but reflection, as viii. 84. 1. So a)nalogi/zesqai, v. 7. 3; viii. 83. 10. —

w)mo\n to\ bou/leuma kai\ me/ga: the pred. position of the adjs. throws the chief stress on them. me/ga pregnant = deino/n. See on c. 3. 3. ma=llon h)\ ou), as in ii. 62. 18, and often in Hdt. and Dion. H. The neg. implied in ma=llon h)\ sometimes induces a pleonastic neg. in the following clause. Kühn. 516, 6; Kr. Spr. 49, 2, 4.—18.

tw=n *mutilhnai/wn oi( paro/ntes pre/sbeis: Steup thinks this cannot be the same embassy as that mentioned in c. 28. 7, because Paches could not have executed the decree of the Athenians without violating the agreement (c. 28. 8, 9). But it seems more natural, since Thuc. mentions neither the return of the embassy of c. 28. 7, nor the sending of another, to suppose that the pre/sbeis remained at Athens in the hope of persuading the Athenians to milder measures. The spirit of the agreement was fulfilled when orders came from Athens, whether the ambassadors returned or remained.—19.

oi( . . . cumpra/ssontes: cf. c. 101. 4. For the position of the gen. tw=n *)aqhnai/wn, see on c. 22. 27.—20.

pareskeu/asan: induced, as in iv. 132. 11; viii. 52. 1; and passive in vii. 35. 2. Kühn. 473, 2. —

tou\s e)n te/lei: i.e. the prytanes, or the ten strathgoi/, the former of whom ordinarily summoned assemblies, though the latter had this right in war and under extraordinary circumstances. See on ii. 22. 4; 59. 11; iv. 118. 53. See Schoemann, Gr. Ant. i.^{3} p. 404.—21.

au)=qis gnw/mas proqei=nai: to bring the subject again under consideration, also c. 42. 1; vi. 14. 3; and in c. 38. 2, le/gein protiqe/nai. See on i. 139. 18.—22.

e)/ndhlon h)=n: with partic., as in ii. 64. 31. G. 1589; H. 981. Cf. iv. 41. 14; vi. 36. 6.—

to\ ple/on tw=n politw=n: see on c. 35. 6.—23.

tinas: indef., it is true, as in iv. 69. 4; vi. 41. 4; vii. 29. 14, but referring to tou\s e)n te/lei, —a)podou=nai: with inf. as i. 144. 12; ii. 71. 14.

katasta/shs e)kklhsi/as: as in i. 31. 15, of an assembly convoked for a special purpose, i.e. su/gklhtos. See Schoemann Gr. Antiq. i.^{3} p. 403.

a)f) e(ka/stwn e)le/gonto: a)po/, on the part of, as in c. 82. 41; v. 82. 16; vi. 32. 18; with mhnu/esqai, vi. 28. 1; a)gge/llesqai, vi. 45. 2. See on i. 17. 4, and Herbst, Gegen Cobet, p. 50.— 25.

th\n prote/ran e)nenikh/kei: here of the person, as ii. 12. 6; 54. 7 of the view that prevails. For the cognate acc. th\n prote/ran sc. gnw/mhn, see G. 1052; H. 716 a; Kr. Spr. 46, 6. Cf. Plato Gorg. 456 a oi( nikw=ntes ta\s gnw/mas, Ar. Nub. 432. See App.— 26.

biaio/tatos: most arbilrary and arrogant, as in i. 95. 1.—27.

para\ polu/: by far. Kühn. 349^{b}, 7 b. Cf. i. 29. 19; ii. 8. 13; 89. 16; viii. 6. 16.—

piqanw/tatos: cf. iv. 21. 10; vi. 35. 9; and see Introd. to Book I., p. 45, 46. Aristotle says of Cleon, *)aq. *holit. 28, dokei= ma/lista diafqei=rai to\n dh=mon tai=s o(rmai=s, kai\ prw=tos e)pi\ tou= bh/matos a)ne/krage kai\ e)loidorh/sato kai\ perizwsa/menos e)dhmhgo/rhse, tw=n a)/llwn e)n ko/smw| lego/ntwn. SPEECH OF CLEON. cc. 37-40.

The demos is too prone to mild treatment of subject states: it incurs thereby great harm, but will incur greater still, if it does not enforce decrees once adopted, and recognize that for the welfare of the state, sober judgment (swfrosu/nh) on the part of citizens is above all things requisite.

polla/kis me\n . . . kai\ a)/llote . . . ma/lista de/: cf. vii. 8. 5.—2.

a)du/naton: incompetent. See Ullrich, Beitr. 1862, p. 20 ff. For the neut. pred. adj. with fem. subj., see G. 925; H. 617. Cf. l. 16; vi. 39. 1; Hdt. i. 62. 6; Ar. Eccl. 236.—

e(te/rwn: in the general and comprehensive sense of any others, as i. 85. 6; ii. 35. 14.

dia\ ga\r to\ . . . e)/xete: cf. similar thought in i. 68. § 1.—4.

to\ kaq) h(me/-

ran . . . pro\s a)llh/lous: more fully expressed by Pericles in ii. 37. § 2. pro/s and e)s denoting general relations without difference of meaning here, as l. 7, 9 below; also c. 54. 2; i. 32. 10; 38. 1.—5.

to\ au)to/: sc. to\ a)dee\s kai\ a)nepibou/leuton.—kai\ o(/ ti a)\n . . . malaki/zesqai: and whatever false step you make through being misled by their words, or whatever you yield through pity, you do not consider that your yielding brings danger to yourselces and does not win favour from your allies.—6.

h)\ lo/gw| peisqe/ntes . . . h)\ oi)/ktw| e)ndw=te: i.e. the two chief sources from which Cleon has reason to fear opposition to his advice, to which is added in c. 40 h( e)piei/keia. Instead of e)ndo/ntes, as was to be expected, e)ndw=te is made coord. with a(ma/rthte.—oi)/ktw|: cf. c. 40. 7; 48. 1.—7.

e)pikindu/nws e)s u(ma=s: cf. i. 91. 26 e)s tou\s pa/ntas w)felimw/teron.—kai\ ou)k: and not, differing from ou)de/ as et non from neque. —

ou)k e)s th\n xa/rin: lit. not for the gratitude of. Cf. c. 40. 19; ii. 40. 22. —8.

malaki/zesqai: as in c. 40. 34; vi. 29. 11.—

o(/ti turanni/da e)/xete th\n a)rxh/n: exactly as Pericles had expressed himself in ii. 63. 8. Thuc. prob. purposely puts into the mouth of Cleon turns of thought and expression which are clearly echoes of the speeches of Pericles. Cf. c. 38. § 1; 40. § 4. Far as Cleon was removed from him in mind and mode of thinking, he had yet learned from him what was effective in a speech. —9.

kai\ pro\s e)pibouleu/ontas au)tou\s kai\ a)/kontas a)rxome/nous: emphatically opp. to a)nepibou/leuton pro\s a)llh/lous. And indeed as against those who are themselves plotting against you and bear your rule unwillingly. —10.

ou)k e)c w(=n . . . perige/nhsqe: this explanation of a)/kontas a)rxome/nous is added without connecting word, as c. 63. 8 h(\n au)toi\ ma/lista proba/llesqe: i(kanh/ ge h)=n kte(., iv. 10. 10 to\ duse/mbaton h(me/teron nomi/zw: meno/ntwn h(mw=n cu/mmaxon gi/gnetai. In all three cases a rel. pron. (here oi(/) is read in only a few and inferior Mss. They obey you not in consequence of the kindnesses you do them to your own hurt, but in consequence of the superiority you have acquired by strength rather than by their good will. So Cl. and Bm. explain, but see App. e)c w(=n, for the assimilation, see G. 1032; H. 996 a. ma=llon h)/ completely subordinates the second member. Cf. l. 26; c. 63. 20; 64. 9.

be/baion: the adj. is pred. to kaqesthke/nai, as c. 102. 25; i. 70. 2; 102. 6; ii. 59. 8; iv. 26. 24; 78. 12; vi. 15. 17; vii. 28. 31. Pred. adjs. occur with the pres. kaqi/stasqai, iv. 92. 15; with the aor. katasth=nai, i. 6. 16; 23. 11; vi. 59. 4.—

w(=n a)\n do/ch| pe/ri: i.e. peri\ tou/twn, peri\ w(=n a)\n do/ch|, or, with Ullrich (Beitr. p. 23), = peri\ tou/twn a(\ a)\n do/ch|, in which case it would be an instance of the rare attraction of the nom., as in vii. 67. 19. G. 1033; Kühn. 555, N. 4.—15.

krei/sswn e)sti/n: is stronger, i.e. can use its strength more effectually, as also c. 48. 8.—

a)ku/rois: without authority, i.e. not enforced. The antithesis to a)ki/nhtoi is not logically exact, but suits the case. Alcibiades uses a similar paradox, vi. 18. § 7; but in neither case is the argument fair, because the question is not one of abolishing a fundamental law of the state (kinei=n no/mon), but of rescinding a decree of the demos (kaqairei=n yh/fisma), which could be set aside by another yh/fisma. Cleon's wish seems to be ‘to confound yhfi/smata and no/moi together, and to excite against the repeal of one of the former the same strong feeling which was entertained in Greece against any alteration of the latter.’ Arn. On the relation of no/mos, which, ace. to Aristotle, was a law of general application, to yh/fisma, a decree for an individual case (Eth. v. 14; Pol. iv. 4), see Tarbell, Am. J. of Ph. x. p. 79 ff. See also Hermann, Gr. Ant. i.^{6} § 91. Cf. Dio C.'s imitation of the passage (liii. 10), ta\ ga\r e)n tau)tw=| me/nonta, ka)\n xei/rw h)=|, sumforw/tera tw=n a)ei\ kainotomoume/nwn, ka)\n belti/w ei)=nai dokh=|, e)sti/n. Junge, zur Rede d. Kleon, 1879, p. 2 ff., thinks that the words mhde\ . . . a)ku/rois, and in § 4, oi( me\n fai/nesqai and oi( de\ . . . ei)=nai, refer to a law against reconsidering, within a certain period, things concerning which there was already a yh/fisma. A comparison with vi. 14 makes this argument seem plausible; but surely in that case Cleon would have made the charge of parano/mwn.—16. a)maqi/a: ignorance, i.e. lack of training and experience. Cf. i. 68. 4; ii. 40. 14. The whole sentiment is like that of Archidamus in i. 84. § 3 (cf. Arist. Rhet. i. 15. 12), and is more in accord with Spartan ideas than with Athenian, as expressed by Pericles in ii. 40.—

decio/ths: cleverness, = cu/nesis, l. 23; c. 82. 50.—17.

oi( faulo/teroi: the simpler, i.e. humbler, inferior, as c. 83. 8. Cf. also vii. 77. 9.—

pro/s: in comparison with, as in c. 56. 16; i. 6. 15; 10. 8; ii. 35. 11. Kühn. 441, iii, 3 c; Kr. Spr. 49, 2, 8.—18.

w(s

e)pi\ to\ plei=on: for the most part, only here, like w(s ta\ plei/w, c. 83. 8, for the usual w(s e)pi\ to\ polu/, ii. 13. 23; v. 107. 3. See App. on i. 12. 4.—

a)/meinon oi)kou=si ta\s po/leis: administer their states better. The passive occurs viii. 67. 6 a)/rista h( po/lis oi)kh/setai. Cf. also i. 17. 4; vi. 18. 44. For the sentiment, cf. Eur. El. 386 oi( ga\r toiou=toi ta\s po/leis oi)kou=sin eu)= kai\ dw/mata.

oi( me/n: sc. oi( cunetw/teroi.— 20. tw=n te ai)ei\ . . . perigi/gnesqai: and to surpass whatever is on every occasion said for the public good. le/gesqai e)s to\ koino/n = e)s to\ koino\n bouleu/esqai, i. 91. 29. Cf. in commune consulere, Ter. Andria iii. 3. 16; in commune consultare, Plin. Epist. vi. 15. 16. With the general sentiment Arn. compares Tac. Hist. i. 26 consilii quamvis egregii, quod non ipse adferret, inimicus, et adversus peritos pervicax.—21.

w(s e)n a)/llois . . . th\n gnw/mhn: as if in no other affairs of greater importance could they display their opinion, i.e. show their insight. Cf. Dio C. xlvii. 1 w(s ou)k a)\n a)/llws th\n e)autou= deino/thta diadei/cas. For partic. with a)\n representing aor. opt., see GMT. 215; H. 987 a; Kr. Spr. 69, 7, 1. See on vii. 67. 26.—22.

sfa/llousi ta\s po/leis: cf. vi. 15. 20.— 23.

oi( de/: sc. oi( faulo/teroi.—th=| e)c e(autw=n cune/sei: their own cleverness. Cf. to\ a)f) h(mw=n au)tw=n eu)/yuxon, ii. 39. 6.—

a)maqe/steroi tw=n no/mwn: cf. the expression of Archidamus, i. 84. 13, a)maqe/steron tw=n no/mwn th=s u(peroyi/as paideuo/menoi.—24. a)dunatw/teroi . . . lo/gon: less able to criticise the speech of a good speaker. It is only in the order of the words that the clause is like the preceding. See on i. 69. 32. a)dunatw/teroi, sc. h)\ cunetw/teroi, limited by me/myasqai, tou= kalw=s ei)po/ntos depending on lo/gon.—25. kritai\ de\ o)/ntes . . . a)gwnistai/: being impartial judges rather than contending disputants. For a)po\ tou= i)/sou, see on c. 10. 12; i. 77. 8. a)gwnistai/ has also the secondary meaning of partisans striving for personal pre-eminence and advantage. Cf. l. 27 cune/sews a)gw=ni, and c. 82. 50 cune/sews a)gw/nisma.—26. o)rqou=ntai ta\ plei/w: they are generally in prosperity, and with them the state, which, as the antithesis to sfa/llousi ta\s po/leis shows, is esp. had in mind. o)rqou=ntai as in c. 30. 15; 42. 20; ii. 60. 5; v. 9. 14; 111. 24; vi. 9. 11; viii. 64. 18; Hdt. i. 208. 8. ta\ plei/w is a little stronger than ta\ polla/ in Bl. and Jow. render o)rqou=ntai here judge rightly, or are in the right.

w(/s: for kai\ ou(/tws only here in Thuc. and rare also elsewhere in Attic prose. It occurs in Plato, Prot. 338 a (as here with ou)=n); Rep. 530 d. Cf. Hdt. ix. 18. 11. It is common in Homer and other poets, rare in the Attic poets. See Kr. Dial. 77, 1. Cf. Soph. O. C. 1242; Eur. Bacch. 1068. Kr. Spr. 25, 10, 11; Kühn. 561, N. 4.—27.

h(ma=s: we, who come forward as orators, as opp. to u(me/teron plh=qos. Cf. c. 43. 13. —

deino/thti kai\ cune/sews a)gw=ni: with eloquence and the exercise of elererness. Strietly the gen. deino/thtos was to be expected, but instead of this, one quality (deino/ths) and the ambitious exercise of the other (cune/sews a)gw/n) are loosely connected. deino/thti, Schol. th=| r(htorikh=| duna/mei. Cf. viii. 68. 9. —28.

para\ do/can: “contrary to our own judgment,” as in Plato Crit. 49 c; Prot. 337 b. So Steup explains, citing in support of his view c. 38. § 2, and c. 42. 29 para\ gnw/mhn ti kai\ pro\s xa/rin le/goi. See also Junge, ibid. p. 7 f. But Cl. adopts, with St. and Bm., Reiske's conjecture (see also Ullrich, Beitr. 1862, p. 48) para\ to\ do/can (contrary to the decree of the majority), because para\ do/can means everywhere else in Thuc. contrary to expectation, which is, of course, inadmissible here. Cf. c. 39. 25; 93. 4; i. 141. 21; ii. 49. 28; iv. 106. 10; viii. 42. 13. With this view, to\ do/can is as to\ dokou=n, c. 38. 11; i. 84. 8, and parainei=n, absolute, as in ii. 13. 15; vi. 24. 7; viii. 46. 29; 71. 25.

That our magistrates should suffer a reconsideration of our decision concerning Mytilene is surprising, and attempts to persuade you to a different conclusion can proceed only from dishonest motives. But it is no wonder that attempts are made to mislead you by fine-sounding words, since you are wont to devote yourselves to the enjoyment of brilliant speeches rather than to forming a judgment from actual cireumstances.

e)gw\ me\n o( au)to/s ei)mi: the very words of Pericles, ii. 61. 5. Cf. Soph. O. R. 557 kai\ nu=n e)/q: au(to/s ei)mi tw=| bonleu/mati. Dio C. imitates the passage, xxxviii. 44 e)gw\ me\n ga\r kai\ to/te kai\ nu=n th\n au)th\n gnw/mhn e)/xw kai\ ou) metaba/llomai. Cf. also Soph. Phil. 521; Eur. Phoen. 920.—2.

qauma/zw tw=n proqe/ntwn . . . le/gein: tw=n proqe/ntwn is short for tw=n proqe/ntwn o(/ti prou/qesan. Cf. u(mw=n qauma/zw, ei) mh\ bohqh/sete, Xen. Hell. ii. 3. 53; also Lys. xii. 86; Lyeurg. in Leocr. 135. For the gen., see G. 1126; H. 744; Kr. Spr. 47, 10, 9; Kühn. 417, N. 9. proqei=nai le/gein for the more usual proqei=nai lo/gon, or proqei=nai gnw/mas (c. 36. 21; cf. c. 42. 1)—a)podou=nai bouleu/sasqai (c. 36. 23). Cf. Hdt. viii. 49. 2 proqei=nai gnw/mhn a)pofai/nesqai. See Schoemann, de Comit. Athen., p. 104.—3.

e)mpoihsa/ntwn: causing, as in i. 2. 17; ii. 51. 16.—

pro\s tw=n h)dikhko/twn: in the interest of those who have done wrong. For pro/s with gen., see G. 1216 a; H. 805, 1 b; Kr. Spr. 68, 37, 1; Matth. 590, 6. Cf. c. 59. 1; ii. 86. 19; iv. 10. 8; 29. 11; 92. 36; vii. 36. 18; 81. 27; viii. 36. 9.—4.

a)mblute/ra| th=| o)rgh=|: with duller anger, i.e. anger that has already cooled off. The thought must be completed by supplying the words xro/nou diatribh=s e)mpoihqei/shs. Cf. ii. 40. 21.—5.

e)pece/rxetai: with the dat. (tw=| dra/santi), in the sense of revenge (v. 89. 3; vi. 38. 10), as in that of attack (c. 27. 6; ii. 23. 1; v. 9. 8), of pursuit (iv. 14. 20).—

a)mu/nasqai: without art. as subject. Kr. Spr. 50, 6, 3. Cf. ii. 35. 7; 39. 22; 54. 8; 63. 14; Xen. Resp. Laced. 9. 2 e(/petai th=| a)reth=| sw/|zesqai ei)s to\n plei/w xro/non ma=llon h)\ th=| kaki/a|. —tw=| paqei=n: the dat. depends not upon e)gguta/tw alone, which always takes the gen. in Thuc., but upon e)gguta/tw kei/menon, the partic. being pf. pass. of tiqe/nai. Schol. ei) to\ a)mu/nesqai tw=| paqei=n e)ggu\s teqei/h. Cf. e)ggute/rw katasth=sai *)aqhnai/ois, ii. 89. 47. Kr. Di. 48, 9, 2; Matth. 542, N. 1. In Plut. de Sera 2, this passage is cited, and the sentiment approved by the speaker,—not by Plutarch. —6.

a)nti/palon ma/lista th\n timwri/an a)nalamba/nei: takes the punishment that is most adequate. On the omission of o)/n, see App. a)nalamba/nei timwri/an is not found elsewhere, but is to be compared with such expressions as e)/xqran, a)pe/xqeian, ki/ndunon a)nalamba/nein. Reiske and Cl. conjecture lamba/nei, considering the a)na- simply a repetition of the preceding -an, and so St. writes. Kr. suggests a)ntilamba/nei.—7. qauma/zw de\ kai\ o(/stis e)/stai o( a)nterw=n kte(.: as the first clause contains a defiant threat, so by a)ciw/swn a)pofai/nein ta\s me\n *mutilhnai/wn kte(. the presumptive opponent is, with intentional perversion, forced into a false alternative. “Whoever does not vote for the severest punishment of the Mytileneans must show (I wonder who will presume to show) that the revolt of the Mytileneans is helpful to us, while our misfortunes are hurtful to our allies,” i.e. that they, by their revolt, which was certainly detrimental to Athens (h(mete/ras cumfora/s), did us good, but themselves harm. From the impossibility of proving this is to be dedueed the necessity of extreme severity. That the guilt of revolting and the necessity of its punishment do not, however, neces sarily imply the destruction of the guilty, Cleon purposely does not say. A correct conception of the connexion shows that every change proposed is unnecessary. See Junge, ibid. p. 9 f.

kai\ dh=lon o(/ti . . . a)gwni/sait) a)/n: and it is plain that either he has such confidence in his powers of speech as to contend that what is universally acknowledged is not established (clearly known), or, to use St.'s words, id quod omnibus probatum est non constat. to\ dokou=n is here used in the philosophical sense found in Xen. Mem. iv. 6. 15 dia\ tw=n dokou/ntwn toi=s a)nqrw/pois a)/gein tou\s lo/gous. For the force of e)/gnwstai, cf. Dem. xxi. 41 a)\n ga\r tau=q: ou(/tws e)gnwsme/na u(pa/rxh| par) u(mi=n. For the inf., a)ntapofh=nai, dependent on a)gwni/sai) a)/n, cf. c. 82. 59; iv. 87. 23; viii. 89. 30, and see Kr. Spr. 55, 3, 16. The term a)gwni/zesqai is chosen as if the reference were to the delivery of a show-piece (a)gw/nisma, i. 22. 19), and the figure of an oratorical competition is kept up in what follows (a)gw/nwn l. 14, a)gwnoqetou=ntes and qeatai/ l. 16, a)ntagwnizo/menoi l. 25). The interpretation above is essentially that also of Heilmann, Arn., Kr., and Bm. Others (Portus, Duker, Kistemacher, Bredow, Haacke, Goell., and Bl.), understanding to\ dokou=n to refer to the decree passed the day before, explain, “What was most certainly your resolution has really not been adopted.” But this, it is objected, would require to\ do/can.—12. h)\ ke/rdei e)pairo/menos . . . peira/setai: or incited by gain (i.e. bribed), elaborating what is plausible in words he will try to mislead you. Thus an insinuation of bribery is made in advance against any reply. It is the course which is aptly characterized in c. 42. 12 e)kplh=cai a)\n tou/s te a)nterou=ntas kai\ tou\s a)kousome/nous. For ke/rdei e)pairo/menos, see on a)gw=ni e)pairome/nous, c. 37. 27. In c. 40. § 1 also, Cleon makes a distinction between those of his opponents who would display their oratorical skill and those who are bribed. para/gein as in i. 34. 9; 91. 6; ii. 64. 1. For to\ eu)prepe\s tou= lo/gou, cf. c. 11. 10. For the neut. adj. in place of abstract noun, see on c. 30. 4; i. 36. 3.

e(te/rois: Schol. toi=s r(h/torsi.— 15. a)nafe/rei: Schol. a)nafe/rei, a)nade/xetai. It seems not to occur else where with ki/ndunon, but cf. a)nafe/rein fqo/nous kai\ diabola/s, Polyb. i. 36. 3; a)nafe/rein fqo/nous kai\ to\n po/lemon, Polyb. iv. 59. 10; a)nafe/rein to\n po/non, Dion. H. x. 24.

ai)/tioi d' u(mei=s: just as unworthy motives are imputed by Cleon to his presumptive opponent, so the hearer who would show himself favourable to the former is charged with perverse conduct throughout, and this is expressed in a series of partics. and pred. adjs., continuing to the end of the chapter. The charges made are threefold: 1) that in the deliberation more value is placed upon words than facts (kakw=s a)gwnoqetou=ntes . . . a)po\ tw=n lo/gw| kalw=s e)pitimhsa/ntwn); 2) that in speeches what is new and unusual is more applanded than what is tried and in the long run wholesome (kai\ meta\ kaino/thtos . . . a)pobhso/mena); 3) that in the hankering after an ideal state actual conditions are neglected (zhtou=nte/s te . . . i(kanw=s); and finally all these errors are traced to the mania for rhetorical and sophistical performances (a(plw=s te . . . bouleuome/nois).—16.

a)gwnoqetou=ntes: cf. Aeschin. c. Ctes. 180 u(pola/bete toi/nun u(ma=s au)tou\s ei)=nai a)gwnoqe/tas politikh=s a)reth=s, Xen. Anab. iii. 1. 21 a)gwnoqe/tai oi( qeoi/ ei)sin.—qeatai\ me\n . . . tw=n e)/rgwn: “instead of seeing facts as they are and listening to speeches with judgment, you are on the contrary hearers of facts and seers of speeches, in that you view facts past and future in the light of what the orators say (a)po\ tw=n eu)= ei)po/ntwn) and attend upon the speeches as spectators of a contest of sophists, in which the prize is awarded for technical adroitness, not for the truth.” Bm.—17.

ta\ me\n . . . e)pitimhsa/ntwn: not in the facts, but in the discussion of them (tw=n eu)= ei)po/ntwn, tw=n lo/gw| kalw=s e)pitimhsa/ntwn), is found the rule or measure by which is determined (a)po\ . . . skopou=ntes) both the practicability of the me/llonta e)/rga, and the truth about the pepragme/na (though these ought to be experienced, not heard about). skopei=n a)po/ as in i. 21. 11; ii. 48. 14.— 19.

ta\ de\ pepragme/na h)/dh: sc. skopou=ntes.—ou) to\ drasqe\n pisto/teron o)/yei labo/ntes h)\ to\ a)kousqe/n: not taking what is done as more to be trusted, because you have seen it, than what is heard. labei=n = u(polabei=n, as in ii. 42. 17; iv. 106. 6. With the sentiment of the whole passage, cf. vii. 48. 20 ff. to\ drasqe/n as in vi. 53. 8.

kai\ meta\ kaino/thtos me\n lo/gou . . . e)qe/lein: the best to be deceived with novelty of words and to be un- willing to follow with the rest in case of approved advice, i.e. where a proposition (lo/gou) has been tested and approved. With meta\ kaino/thtos lo/gou, cf. Isoc. x. 2 e)pi\ th=| kaino/thti tw=n eu(rhme/nwn. a)/ristoi, sc. o)/ntes, ironieal, adepts. It is equiv. to e)pith/deioi, as the Schol. says, just as in Hdt. i. 193. 13 a)ri/sth . . . *dh/mhtros ka/rpon e)kfe/rein, iii. 80. 21 diabola\s a)/ristos e)nde/kesqai. Cf. also Hdt. i. 136. 2 ma/xesqai ei)=nai a)gaqo/n, and Hes. Op. 763, 779, 813; Soph. O. T. 440; Ar. Nub. 430; Xen. Cyrop. v. 4. 44. G. 1526; H. 952.—23.

dou=loi o)/ntes tw=n ai)ei\ a)to/pwn: slaves of every new extravagance. dou=loi o)/ntes, i.e. xai/rontes kai\ pisteu/onte/s, Schol. a)to/pwn as in ii. 49. 8; Schol. parado/cwn. Cf. Greg. Naz. i. p. 53 dou=loi o)/ntes tw=n a)ei\ paro/ntwn, Aristid. ii. 150 a th=s xrei/as a)ei\ dou/lous ei)=nai.—u(pero/ptai de\ tw=n ei)wqo/twn: scorners of what is established. u(pero/ptai not found elsewhere in Attic; Schol. katafronou=ntes. Both dou=loi and u(pero/ptai are explanatory of a)/ristoi, while tw=n ai)ei\ a)to/pwn represents kaino/thtos lo/gou, as tw=n ei)wqo/twn does dedokimasme/nou. In illustration of the whole passage, Bl. compares Ar. Eccles. 581-588.

ma/lista me/n, ei) de\ mh/: as in i. 32. 4; ii. 72. 8; iv. 104. 20; v. 21. 15; viii. 91. 15.—

au)to\s e(/kastos boulo/menos: the distrib. pron. after pl. subj. (u(mei=s), as in i. 141. 27; ii. 16. 11. —25.

a)ntagwnizo/menoi kte(.: the pl. is resumed. On the partic. depends not only dokei=n, but also ei)=nai with its preds. pro/qumoi and bradei=s. On dokei=n depend both a)kolouqh=sai and proepaine/sai. Vying with those that say such things, in seeming not to follow after them in insight, but when any one says anything clerer to applaud it beforehand. Cf. Dio C. lii. 8 a)ntagwnizo/menoi mh\ dokei=n o)rgi/zesqai.—toiau=ta: sc. kaina/ and a)/topa. So generally explained, but Steup brackets toi=s toiau=ta le/gousi. See App.— 27.

proepaine/sai: found only here. Cf. e)paine/sai, approve, iv. 65. 8; v. 37. 24.—

kai\ proaisqe/sqai te . . . a)pobhso/mena: and (vying) in being both eager to perceive beforehand what is said and slow to anticipate what will come of it. The first kai/ connects ei)=nai with dokei=n; while te, kai/ connect proaisqe/sqai pro/qumoi and pronoh=sai bradei=s, the emphasis being on the former, as in ii. 39. 24. See App.

a)/llo ti . . . zw=men: an entirely different world, so to speak, from that in which we live. w(s ei)pei=n, as always in Thuc., not w(s e)/pos ei)pei=n, as in Plato and the orators. GMT. 777, 1; H. 956. Cf. i. 1. 9. For the pl. oi(=s after a)/llo, see Kr. Spr. 58, 4, 5.— 31.

a(plw=s te: and in a word, as in c. 45. 29; 82. 34. te inferential, and so, as que in Lat. See on i. 4. 5.—

a)koh=s h(donh=|: cf. c. 40. 7 h(donh=| lo/gwn. —h(ssw/menoi: with dat. as vii. 25. 41 ou) th=| tw=n polemi/wn i)sxu/i . . . h(sshqei=en. Elsewhere in figurative sense with the gen., as iv. 37. 6; v. 111. 15. In connexion with Cleon's placing the source of all evil in the prevailing enjoyment of fine speeches, is to be remembered the fact that about the end of this summer (see on c. 86. 12) Gorgias came to Athens for the first time, as ambassador from Leontini, and though Cleon could not have had him in mind in his real speech, Thuc. doubtless did, as he wrote the speech. —

sofistw=n: only here in Thuc., in Cleon's mouth, in the same unfavourable sense as often in Aristophanes (Nub. 331, 1111), Xenophon (Mem. i. 6. 13), and Plato (Phaedr. 257 d; Prot. 312 a, etc.).—32.

qeatai=s e)oiko/tes kaqhme/nois: the perversity of the practice of the sophists, whose object was not instruction, but vainglorious display, is characterized by qeatai/ (cf. qeatai\ tw=n lo/gwn, l. 16). kaqhme/nois is usually taken as explanatory of qeatai=s, sitting idly, as in Dem. ii. 23, 24; iv. 9, 44; viii. 77—similarly iv. 124. 24. But Kr. objects that no activity is required of spectators, and Steup seems clearly right in considering (with Hude, p. 98) qeatai=s as pred. Like men sitting as spectators of sophists rather than like men deliberating about the welfare of the state.

Do not allow yourselves to be deceived in this case, but recognize that the Mytileneans have been guilty of an unpardonable crime, in that they have taken advantage of our embarrassment, in order to revolt, although they were far more favoured than other allies. § 1-5. All are alike guilty, the demos as well as the aristocrats, and untimely forbearance would only occasion further revolts, and bring upon you greater and greater losses. § 6-8.

w(=n: sc. e)pithdeuma/twn w(=n ei)=pen a)/rti, Schol. It covers the whole course of the Athenians as described in c. 38. § 4-7. The rel. is emphatic, as in c. 43. 1; 46. 20; i. 9. 19, etc.—

a)pofai/nw: I declare, as in ii. 62. 10. Cf. c. 67. 10. v. H.'s conjecture, a)pofanw=, is unnecessary.—2.

dh/: with the sup. as in c. 113. 22; i. 1. 8; vii. 87. 23, and freq.—

mi/an po/lin: appos. to *mutilhnai/ous, as viii. 40. 7 toi=s *xi/ois . . . mia=| ge po/lei . . . plei=stoi geno/menoi. For similar expressions, cf. c. 113. 21; i. 80. 13; vi. 20. 8; viii. 68. 5. Kr. Spr. 49, 10, 5.

oi(/tines: without tou/tois, as in v. 16. 16, about equiv. to ei)/ tines. Kr. Spr. 51, 13, 3.—

dunatoi/: without o)/ntes, co-ord. with the partic. a)nagkasqe/ntes, as in c. 38. 22 a)/ristoi is with boulo/menos and a)ntagwnizo/menoi. —5. nh=son de\ oi(/tines: nh=son, as strongest security for an au)ta/rkhs qe/sis (i. 37. 11) and for immunity from attack (a)lhpto/n, i. 37. 20), placed before the rel. Cf. vi. 36. 1. Kr. Spr. 54, 17, 7; Kühn. 606, 6. Cf. di/kas de\ o(/ti e)qe/lomen, i. 144. 14. oi(/tines, though hypothetical, has so manifest a reference to the Mytileneans that in l. 8 the neg. is ou) not mh/.—7. e)n w(=| kai\ au)toi/: not entirely dependent, therefore, on Attie protection. e)n w(=|, in which case. See on i. 39. 11.—

paraskeuh=|: force, as in vi. 31. 6; vii. 36. 3. Lesbian triremes are mentioned c. 4. 6; i. 116. 11; ii. 9. 20; 56. 7.—9.

timw/menoi: see on c. 9. 12. —

e)s ta\ prw=ta: imprimis, as c. 56. 22.—10.

ti/ a)/llo h)/: as in c. 58. 24; v. 98. 8, with following finite verb. The same elliptical const. as ou)de\n a)/llo h)/, ii. 16. 10. H. 612; Kr. Spr. 62, 3, 7; Kühn. 587, 18.—

e)pane/sthsan ma=llon h)\ a)pe/sthsan: rose up against rather than revolted from. For the paronomasia, freq. in Thuc., cf. c. 82. 31, and see on i. 33. 26. Cf. Dion. H. Ant. iii. 8. 2 ou) mo/non a)po/stasin e)bou/leusan a)f) u(mw=n, a)lla\ kai\ e)pana/stasin, Dio C. lxxi. 24 dhmosi/a te a)po/stasis, ma=llon de\ e)pana/stasis.— 11. me/n ge: as if the explanation of the e)pana/stasis also were to follow; but this is omitted since it is clear enough from the context. For the combination me/n ge, see on i. 40. 15.— 12.

meta\ tw=n polemiwta/twn sta/ntes: combining with our worst enemies. Cf. i. 33. 22; vii. 57. 4; 61. 12, and see on c. 11. 18.—13.

h(ma=s: emphatic position, as in i. 68. 1; 70. 5; v. 82. 23; vii. 78. 26.—14.

kaq) au(tou/s: of themselves, as in iv. 64. 14, 21, and freq.—

ktw/menoi: seeking to acquire, as in ii. 62. 26. Cf. e)pikta=sqai, i. 144. 2; ii. 65. 24.

para/deigma: warning example. The sing. as in iv. 92. 18, but the plur. c. 10. 20; 11. 24; vi. 77. 4. It is placed first, as if to be pred. to both ou)/te clauses; but as eu)daimoni/a of course cannot be a warning, an anacoluthon arises. For similar const., cf. c. 96. 11.—16.

o(/soi . . . e)xeirw/qhsan: cf. c. 10. § 4 ff.; i. 98. § 4; 99.—17.

pare/sxen o)/knon mh\ e)lqei=n: for the neg., see on c. 32. 14.—

ta\ deina/: dangers. See on c. 22. 26.—18.

e)lpi/santes makro/tera me\n th=s duna/mews, e)la/ssw de\ th=s boulh/sews: the antithesis is well chosen, in order to rouse both contempt and bitterness. “Their hopes went indeed far beyond their strength, but not far enough to satisfy their hate.” Cf. Schol. h)/lpisan, fhsi/n, a)posth=nai h(mw=n, o(/per mei=zon me/n e)sti th=s duna/mews au)tw=n, e)/latton de\ th=s boulh/sews au)tw=n. e)bou/lonto ga\r ou) mo/non a)posth=nai h(mw=n a)lla\ dh\ kai\ kaqelei=n th\n du/namin th=s po/lews, dia\ to\ loipo\n a)dew=s zh=n. Herbst (Zu Thuk. Erkl. u.s.w. 1892, p. 82) thinks that a contrast is intended between the Mytilenean view of their own power and that of the Athenians, i.e. they expected for themselves more than they could accomplish and from the Athenians less than they (the Mytileneans) could wish, so greatly did they underestimate the strength of the Athenians. —20.

i)sxu\n a)ciw/santes. . . proqei=nai: “having once determined to put might before right.” The clause is all the more effective since a good word (a)ciw/santes) is made to serve in a bad cause. i)sxu/s, as i. 76. 15, of brute force. proqei=nai with acc. and gen. also c. 84. 14; i. 76. 15; Hdt. iii. 53. 16; Soph. O. C. 419.—21.

e)n w(=|: emphasizes here more sharply than usual the moment, when in the hope of getting the better of the Athenians, now hard pressed by war and pestilence (cf. c. 3. § 1; 13. § 3), they made an unprovoked attack. See on

ei)/wqe de\ . . . e)s u(/brin tre/pein: unexpected good fortune is wont to make insolent those cities upon which it has come in the highest degree and in the shortest time. With the sentiment, cf. Liv. xxx. 42. 15 raro simul hominibus bonam fortunam bonamque mentem dari; also Thuc. iv. 17. § 4; Dem. i. 23; Aristid. ii. 57. a)rposdo/khtos eu)praci/a is subj. of both clauses. For the Mytileneans it consisted in the straits of the Athenians, indicated by e)n w(=| . . . perie/sesqai. ai(=s=tau/tas ai(=s, the terminal dat. with e)lqei=n, as in c. 70. 2 and often. See on c. 5. 12; i. 13. 12. ma/lista and di) e)laxi/stou are adv. with e)/lqh|. Cf. di) o)li/gou, iv. 95. 1; v. 69. 19; vi. 47. 10; vii. 15. 13, and see on ii. 42. 24. e)s u(/brin tre/pein has tau/tas understood as object. Cf. c. 13. 4. See App.—24.

ta\ polla\ kte(.: the Schol. correctly explains = w(s e)pi\ to\ polu/. The subj. is eu)tuxou=nta with its modifiers. “And for the most part success that comes to men in accordance with reasonable calculations is safer than that which surpasses expectation, and mankind apparently find it easier to repel adversity, than to maintain prosperity.” eu)tuxou=nta as in iv. 62. 17; 79. 4. For omission of art., cf. c. 48. 8. GMT. 827. diasw/|zesqai as in v. 16. 11; 46. 9.

xrh=n de\ . . . tetimh=sqai: for the const., see GMT. 415, 419; H. 834, 897.—

kai\ pa/lai: iam pridem. Cf. c. 13. 5; 104. 14.—27.

mhde\n diafe/rontas tw=n a)/llwn: pred. to tetimh=sqai, without any advantage over others. ou(/tw tetimh=sqai u(f) h(mw=n w(s ou)de\n diafe/rontas tw=n a)/llwn, Schol. diafero/ntws, which St. has adopted, is the reading of some of the Mss., and is supported by Thuc.'s usage (i. 38. 10; 138. 11; ii. 40. 11; 51. 2; viii. 68. 17), as well as by the imitation of Dio C. xxxviii. 30. 3 h)\ ou)=n a)po\ prw/ths e)xrh=n mhde\n diafero/ntws h(ma=s tw=n a)/llwn a)nqrw/pwn hu)ch=sqai.— 28. kai\ ou)k: introduces in parataxis the result of the cond. implied in the preceding clause.—

e)s to/de: adeo, as in i. 75. 8.—

e)cu/brisan: also i. 84. 6.—29.

pe/fuke ga\r kai\ a)/llws kte(.: passes from the present case to a general remark, as in i. 99. 6; viii. 45. 6; Plut. Tim. 52 a. With the sentiment, cf. iv. 61. 19.—

to\ qerapeu=on, to\ mh\ u(pei=kon: collective neuters with personal force, as ii. 45. 5; iv. 61. 20. Kr. Spr. 43, 4, 17.— 30.

u(perfronei=n: with acc. also vi. 68. 10. Kr. Spr. 47, 23, 1.

kolasqe/ntwn: on the form, see App.—

kai\ nu=n: even now, opp. to kai\ pa/lai, —

kai\ mh/: covers both the following clauses.—32.

h( ai)ti/a prosteqh=|: for the act. with acc., cf. l. 38; 42. 25; iv. 20. 12.—

a)polu/shte: for aor. subjv. in prohibition, see GMT. 259; H. 874; Kühn. 397, 3.—33.

h(mi=n ge: i.e. against us at least they were united, even if they were at variance among themselves.—

oi(=s g' e)ch=n: grammatically construed with pa/ntes, though really only the dh=mos is had in mind here, as well as in the next clause. For const., see on l. 26 above.— 34.

trapome/nois: this reading of a few good Mss., is more appropriate with e)n th=| po/lei ei)=nai than the vulg. trepome/nois. “Who might have turned to us and been now reinstated in their city.” As to this rendering, which is essentially that of Va., see also L. Herbst, Philol. xlii. p. 711.—

a)lla\ . . . cunape/sthsan: but considering the danger with the oligarchs safer (than that with us), they joined them in revolt. Cf. c. 47. 3. Const. bebaio/teron with ki/ndunon, as v. 108. 2.

tw=n te cumma/xwn: introduces the new consideration with emphasis. The part. gen. covers not only toi=s te a)nagkasqei=sin . . . a)posta=si, but also ti/na oi)/esqe o(/ntina ou). Both a)nagkasqei=sin and e(kou=sin are pred. to a)posta=si. —38. ti/na . . . o(/ntina ou): as in c. 46. 8, this becomes by attraction one word, as it were, in force and const. like ou)dei\s o(/stis ou), c. 81. 24; vii. 87. 14. Cf. Xen. Cyrop. i. 4. 25 ou)de/na e)/fasan o(/ntin) ou) dakru/ont) a)postre/fesqai. Kr. Spr. 51, 10, 11; Kühn. 555, 5. After the long protasis, oi)/esqe repeats ske/yasqe of —

braxei/a| profa/sei: on a trifling pretext, as in i. 141. 4. For the force of braxei=a, see on c. 36. 12; i. 14. 11.—39.

katorqw/santi, sfale/nti: cf. c. 14. 5, 7; ii. 65. 28, 29; vi. 12. 7, 8.—

e)leuqe/rwsis h)\ paqei=n: for the noun and inf. co-ordinated as subj. of h)=|, see Kr. Spr. 59, 2, 3.

h(mi=n de/: what follows, though logically dependent on ske/yasqe, is grammatically independent. — 41.

a)pokekinduneu/setai: pass. prob. only here; in vii. 81. 26 intr. Kr. Spr. 52, 3, 4. Cf. ii. 43. 26 h( e)nanti/a meta- bolh\ . . . e)/ti kinduneu/etai, Dem. xviii. 278 tw=n o(/lwn ti kinduneu/etai th=| po/lei, xxxiv. 28 ta\ xrh/mata h)/dh kinduneu/etai tw=| danei/santi, xix. 285 ta\ me/gista kinduneu/etai th=| po/lei. For fut. pf. expressing certainty that an action will immediately take place, see GMT. 79; Kr. Spr. 53, 9, 3.—42.

tuxo/ntes: = katorqw/santes, as in c. 42. 18; 82. 31; iv. 63. 13; v. 111. 27.—43.

th=s e)/peita proso/dou: the future revenue, i.e. that which would have accrued if the state had not been destroyed. Cf. i. 123. 2. to\ loipo/n is pleonastie, it is true, but after the inserted rel. clause it is not without force. But see App.—

di) h(/n: elsewhere h(=|per (h(=|) with i)sxu/ein, as i. 142. 12; ii. 13. 18. It is connected kata\ cu/nesin with th=s proso/dou without e)/peita.—44. sterh/sesqe, e(/comen: change of pers., as in v. 9. § 1. Kühn. 371, N. 5.—45.

dei=: Cobet's conjecture, e)/dei, is unnecessary, since Cleon could hardly mean, either here or c. 40. 39, that their enemies would have to be entirely neglected, but only that conflicts with their cu/mmaxoi would cripple opposition to the nu=n kaqesthko/tes e)xqroi/.

As their guilt has been wilfully incurred, do not weakly allow yourselves to be moved by pity, charm of words, or a spirit of fairness to change your decree. They have merited the severest punishment, and this will secure the permanence of your rule; whereas by revoking your decree you would condemn yourselves.

proqei=nai: proponere, not prosqei=nai (although in Vat. and other good Mss.); alone appropriate with e)lpi/da. Cf. c. 52. 18 kathgori/a ou)demi/a proete/qh.—ou)/te lo/gw| pisth\n ou)/te xrh/masin w)nhth/n: neither relying on eloquence, nor to be bought with money. Both here and c. 38. § 2, those who would merely show their cleverness are set over against those who are bribed. pisto/s in this sense also in Plato Legg. 824 b, and freq. in the poets.—2.

w(s cuggnw/mhn a(martei=n a)nqrwpi/nws lh/yontai: that they will be ercused as having erred humanly, i.e. pardonably. Cf. Dem. xix. 238 cuggnw/mh a)delfw=| bohqei=n. cuggnw/mhn lh/yesqai = cuggnwsqh/sesqai, hence the inf. elause, a(martei=n a)nqrwpi/nws, giving the ground of the pardon. Cf. Hdt. i. 89. 14 cuggno/ntes poie/ein se di/kaia. Kr. Spr. 61, 7, 5; Kühn. 473, 5. cuggnw/mh as in c. 44. 6. For its const. with inf., cf. iv. 61. 17; v. 88. 1; Hdt. i. 39. 1. With the sentiment of the passage, cf. c. 45. 7; Xen. Cyrop. vi. i. 37 cuggnw/mwn tw=n a)nqrwpi/nwn a(marthma/twn, Dio C. p. 24 toi=s a(marta/nousi cuggnw/mhn kata\ to\ a)nqrw/pinon.—4. cu/ggnwmon: = cuggnw/mhs a)/cion (Schol.), as in iv. 98. 19. Cf. Dem. xviii. 274 e)ch/marte/ tis a)/kwn; cuggnw/mh a)nti\ th=s timwri/as tou/tw|, Dion. H. Ant. i. 58 a(/pan de\ cuggnw/mhs a)/cion to\ a)kou/sion. On the accent of cu/ggnwmon (not cuggnw=mon) after the analogy of kako/daimon, see Göttling, Accentlehre, p. 329 f.

kai\ to/te: sc. diemaxesa/mhn. Cf. i. 86. 7; vi. 60. 13.—

diama/xomai: with mh/ and inf. as in c. 42. 7; Xen. Anab. v. 8. 23; Eur. Alc. 694. Cf. also i. 143. 25; v. 41. 14; vii. 63. 1. Kühn. 597, 2 k. to/te refers to what happened in the assembly the day before. Cf. c. 69. 2; i. 101. 8.—

mh\ metagnw=nai u(ma=s ta\ prodedogme/na: depends only on nu=n diama/xomai, having no reference to the to/te prw=ton clause. Kr. Spr. 55, 3, 16. metagnw=nai means rather unvote than repent. Cf. i. 44. 4. The view of MüllerStrübing (Thuk. Forsch. p. 187 ff.) and others, that ta\ prodedogme/na refers to a decree adopted before the assembly of the previous day, is inconsistent with to/te prw=ton, whether the assumed decree were a general measure that was of importance for the question of the treatment of the Mytileneans, or a specific decree referring thereto. For Cleon would hardly have made so covert a reference to such a measure, and such an anticipatory decree would be wholly at variance with c. 35 f.— 6.

trisi\ toi=s a)cumforwta/tois: the order as in i. 74. 3.—7.

h(donh=| lo/gwn: cf. a)koh=s h(donh=|, c. 38. 31; also i. 84. 9; ii. 37. 12.—

e)pieikei/a|: fairness (Matthew Arnold's ‘sweet reasonableness’), esp. the benevolent treatment by the a)/rxousa po/lis of her allies, which does not allow her superiority to be felt. Cf. l. 14; 48. 2; also i. 76. 20, to\ e)pieike/s and its result.

e)/leo/s te: the first of the tri/a ta\ a)cumforw/tata, the other two being oi(/ te te/rpontes (10), kai\ h( e)piei/keia (13). Note the different connexion in i. 74. 4 (te, kai/, kai/).—

tou\s o(moi/ous: Cl., St. and Bl. interpret, those who are like-minded, as in i. 71. 7; but Steup rightly follows Kr. in understanding, those who are placed in like circumstances, i.e. only toward equals, and not subject-allies, is mercy in order. Only this view is compatible with e)c a)na/gkhs kaqestw=tas ai)ei\ polemi/ous.— di/kaios a)ntidi/dosqai: for the pers. const. with inf., see GMT. 762; H. 944 a. The unusual inf. pass., as in c. 94. 22; Xen. Cyneg. 3. 3; Plato Legg. 751 b. GMT. 763; H. 952 a.— 9.

a)ntoiktiou=ntas: found only here. —

e)c a)na/gkhs: necessarily, as in vi. 44. 5; vii. 27. 17.—11.

r(h/tores: here, in Cleon's mouth, as well as in the two other passages in Thuc. (vi. 29. 14; viii. 1. 5), used already in its unfavourable secondary meaning to characterize those who make a profession of oratory (cf. te/rpontes lo/gw|) and use it for personal or party purposes.

e(/cousi kai\ e)n a)/llois e)la/ssosin a)gw=na: i.e. the orators who consider political deliberations as an a)gw/n (c. 38. § 4) will have an opportunity to display their cleverness in other matters of less importance, which will be no hardship to those who treat every matter w(s e)n a)/llois mei/zosin ou)k a)\n dhlw/santes th\n gnw/mhn (c. 37. 21).— 12.

braxe/a: combines the ideas of short duration and slight enjoyment. For the neut. adj. as cognate acc., see G. 1054; H. 716 b; Kr. Spr. 46, 5, 4. —13.

to\ paqei=n eu)=: to\ xrhmati/sasqai u(po\ tw=n *mutilhnai/wn, Schol. The same insinuation of bribery as in l. 2 above and c. 38. 12. The phrase is strengthened by its chiastic relation to the preceding.—14.

e)pithdei/ous: = pistou/s, faithful as allies, as in vi. 46. 8.—15.

o(moi/ws te kai\ ou)de\n h(=sson: on Thiersch's conjecture o(moi/ws for o(moi/ous, see App. With the expression, cf. me/giston de\ kai\ ou)x h(/kista, vii. 44. 32; plei=stos fo/nos kai\ ou)deno\s e)la/sswn, vii. 85. 17.—16.

u(poleipome/nous: who always remain, chiastically opposed to me/llontas.

e(/n te: the reading of one Ms. (C. acc. to Hude), adopted by St. and Cl. for e(\n de/ of the other Mss., acc. to Thuc.'s constant usage in a resumé. So cunelw/n te, ii. 41. 1; vi. 80. 14; a(plw=s te, c. 38. 31; 45. 29; 82. 34; to/ te cu/mpan, c. 92. 17; iv. 63. 9; vii. 77. 33; to/ te cu/mpan ei)pei=n, vii. 49. 18; para/pan te, vi. 18. 41; panti/ te tro/pw|, ii. 21. 21; iv. 4. 11. See Haase, Lucubr. p. 75.—18.

ta\ cu/mfora: sc. u(mi=n au)toi=s. Cf. i. 42. 3.—

toi=s me\n ou) xariei=sqe: you will not win their gratitude. Cf. c. 37. 7 ou)k e)s th\n tw=n cumma/xwn xa/rin.—19. dikaiw/sesqe: not found elsewhere in Thuc., who uses only dikaiou=n = di/kaion h(gei=sqai. It is chosen here with reference to ta\ di/kaia e)s *mutilhnai/ous poih/sete above, do justice to, i.e. punish. It seems to be an Ionic usage. Cf. Hdt. i. 100. 8; iii. 29. 12; v. 92. b 14; Plato Legg. 934 b. See Diener, de Serm. Thuc. p. 30 f. For the mid., cf. kola/zesqai, l. 22; sfa=s au)tou\s bebaiw/sasqai, i. 33. 23.—

ei) ga\r ou(=toi o)rqw=s a)pe/sthsan . . . a)/rxoite: for if these had a right to secede, it would follow that your dominion is unjust, i.e. a revocation of the former decree (gno/ntes a)/llws) would be a confession that the Mytilenean revolt was just, and consequently the Athenian rule unjust. For the mixture of the prot. of the simple (not unreal) cond. with an apod. of the ideal, to soften the assertion, see GMT. 503; H. 901 b. Cf. c. 9. 6; i. 121. 16.—20.

ou) xrew/n, ou) prosh=kon: acc. abs. GMT. 851; H. 973; Kr. Spr. 56, 9, 5. ou) prosh=kon also iv. 95. 4; vi. 82. 10; 84. 1.

ei) de\ dh\ . . . a)ndragaqi/zesqai: not meant, as ei) ga\r . . . a)/rxoite, to substantiate u(ma=s . . . dikaiw/sesqe, but earrying out some such thought, to be supplied, as “which you will certainly not acknowledge.” See App. —

a)ciou=te: are resolved. Cf. ii. 11. 33; 64. 24.—

tou=to dra=n: sc. a)/rxein. For this expression referring to some action just deseribed, see on i. 5. 11. —22.

toi: occurs isolated only twice more in Thuc. (ii. 41. 11; vii. 77. 5), always introducing an emphatic assertion.—

cumfo/rws: tou= cumfe/rontos e(/neka th=| a)rxh=|, Schol. Cf. ta\ cu/mfora, —

kola/zesqai: not pass., but as the whole context, esp. pau/esqai, shows, mid., as dikaiw/sesqe above. Cf. vi. 78. 8; Ar. Vesp. 406, and Steph. Thes. s.v.—

h)/: = ei) de\ mh/, as in ii. 63. 3, which passage is imitated here both in thought and expression (a)ndragaqi/zetai).—23.

e)k tou= a)kindu/nou: adv. periphrasis, as e)k tou= eu)qe/os, i. 34. 10; e)k tou= a)sfalou=s, i. 39. 2; a)po\ tou= profanou=s, i. 35. 17; a)po\ tou= eu)qe/os, c. 43. 5.

th=| te au)th=| zhmi/a| a)ciw/sate a)mu/nasqai: the sentence would properly read h(=| ei)ko\s h)=n au)tou\s u(ma=s a)mu/nasqai krath/santas u(mw=n, but the natural order having been interrupted by kai\ mh\ . . . fanh=nai, expressing the neg. side of the thought, the force of th=| au)th=| is left to be inferred from what follows. Schol. h(=| a)\n e)timwrh/santo kai\ au)toi\ u(ma=s, perigeno/menoi u(mw=n. But Steup would understand, “as on the day before,” objecting that the above interpretation is strained, and that one cannot see how Cleon could have represented the course of the victorious Mytileneans toward the Athenians as a zhmi/a.—a)nalghto/teroi: elsewhere in prose only in late writers. It means here, like dusa/lghtos, Soph. O. R. 12, without feeling, not sensitive; unfeeling, cruel, in Soph. Aj. 946; Trach. 126; Eur. Hipp. 1386. Cf. a)nalgh/tws, unfeelingly, Soph. Aj. 1333.—25.

oi( diafeu/gontes: the pres. partic. here expresses continued action, as in c. 4. 13; ii. 2. 22. It is appos. to u(mei=s understood. Kr. Spr. 50, 7, 14.—26.

ei)ko\s h)=n: as c. 10. 20. Without a)/n (as e)ch=n, i. 37. 21; kalo\n h(=n, i. 38. 10) as apod. to krath/santas (i.e. e)kra/thsan). See on c. 10. 20. GMT. 420, 421; H. 897.—

krath/santas u(mw=n: Cleon uses every where in c. 40 the second person in speaking of the Athenians. Cf. c. 39. 2, 44. h(mw=n, which many editions have, seems to be unsupported by any good Ms.—27.

trou+pa/rcantas: cf. prw=toi tou= toiou/tou u(pa/rcantes, i. 76. 11; toi=s u(pa/rxousi prote/rois, ii. 74. 17. The same force as the simple verb u(ph=rcan, ii. 67. 29.

ma/lista de\ kte(.: whoever without cause have wronged another, follow him up to destroy him utterly, apprchending always danger from the surviving (i.e. not yet completely destroyed) enemy. The thought agrees in the main with the famous words of Tacitus, Agr. 42 proprium humani ingenii est odisse quem laeseris. Cf. Dryden: Forgiveness to the injured does belong, But they ne'er pardon who have done the wrong; and Gladstone, Nineteenth Century, xxv. p. 151, ‘The hatred which nations . . . are apt to feel towards those whom they have injured.’—28.

mh\ cu\n profa/sei: as is charged against the Mytileneans c. 39. § 1, 2.—

e)pece/rxontai kai\ diollu/nai: so with St. for the unintelligible dio/lluntai of the Mss. See Rh. Mus. xv. p. 475. The inf. of purpose as in i. 50. 3; ii. 65. 44. GMT. 770; H. 951.—29.

to\n ki/ndunon . . . e)xqrou=: the gen. with ki/ndunos, as in ii. 63. 5.—30.

o( ga\r mh\ cu\n a)na/gkh| . . . e)xqrou=: contains at once the ground for the extreme fear and therefore extreme hostility of the Mytileneans, and the justification of the severest punishment by the Athenians. ‘For he who has suffered evil without needful cause is more dangerous, if he shall have escaped, than one who was an enemy on equal terms, i.e. than one who has not suffered more than he has inflicted.’ (Arn.) a)po\ th=s i)/shs as in i. 15. 11.

prodo/tai ge/nhsqe: see on c. 2. 11.—32.

geno/menoi o(/ti e)ggu/tata th=| gnw/mh|: = o(/ti e)ggu/tata dianohqe/ntes (i. 143. 22); from which e)nqumhqe/ntes must be supplied with w(s pro\ panto\s . . . xeirw/sasqai. Recalling as nearly as possible the feelings (of the moment) of suffering, and how you would then have prized above everything to crush them. Schol. ei)s eu)/noian e)lqo/ntes w(=n e)me/llete pa/sxein u(po\ *lesbi/wn. Cf. Aesch. iii. 153 ge/nesqe dh/ moi mikro\n xro/non th\n dia/noian mh\ e)n tw=| dikasthri/w|. pro\ panto/s stronger than pro\ pollw=n with the similar expression in i. 33. 8; vi. 10. 16.—34.

a)ntapo/dote: here abs., in the same signification as with ta\ o(moi=a, c. 66. 8; to\ i)/son, i. 43. 5.— —

malakisqe/ntes: as in c. 37. 8; vi. 29. 11.—35.

pro\s to\ paro\n au)ti/ka: the pleonasm is not greater than in e)n tw=| to/te paro/nti, i. 95. 26; tw=n e)/peita mello/ntwn, i. 123. 2; e)n tw=| nu=n paro/nti, Plato Phaedo 67 c. See also on c. 39. 43. For the position, cf. pa/lin h( a)pokomidh/, i. 137. 26. pro\s to\ paro/n, as in ii. 22. 1. Cf. pro\s ta\ paro/nta, ii. 3. 15; 6. 3; 59. 10; iv. 80. 8; e)pi\ tw=| paro/nti, ii. 36. 18; vi. 20. 3.—

tou= e)pikremasqe/ntos pote\ deinou=: the danger once hanging over you. Cl. and Kr. conjecture to/te, as antithesis to au)ti/ka. See on i. 101. 8.

tou/tous te kai\ toi=s a)/llois: te kai/ on account of the antithesis of the pronouns. See on ii. 46. 1. Observe the chiastic order of the sentence.— 37.

toi=s a)/llois . . . zhmiwso/menon: give to the rest of the allies plain warning that whoever revolts shall be punished with death. ‘The const. of the partic., depending on the phrase safe\s para/deigma katasth/sate, seems to be protected by the similar examples, c. 67. 28 poih/sate . . . para/deigma ou) lo/gwn tou\s a)gw=nas proqh/sontes, a)ll) e)/rgwn, c. 64. 1 dh=lon e)poih/sate . . . ou) mhdi/santes, Lycurg. 50 fanero\n pa=sin e)poi/hsan ou)k i)di/a| polemou=ntes, where the partic. clauses take the place of the objects.’ St. Cf. also Hdt. vi. 21. 8 *)aqhnai=oi dh=lon e)poi/hsan u(peraxqesqe/ntes th=| *milh/tou a(lw/si. The const. is the same as with the simple verb dhlou=n. GMT. 904, 907; H. 981; Kühn. 482, 2. The dat. with zhmiwso/menon as in ii. 65. 12. Elsewhere with para/deigma, that which is to be proved, or of which an example is to be given, is expressed (if it be not clear from the context, as in c. 10. 20; 11. 24; 39. 14; ii. 37. 2; iv. 92. 18; v. 90. 7; vi. 77. 4) in the gen., as c. 57. 1; i. 2. 20; v. 95. 3.—39.

h(=sson . . . cumma/xois: cf. c. 39. 45 kai\ o(\n xro/non toi=s nu=n kaqesthko/si dei= e)xqroi=s a)nqi/stasqai.—toi=s u(mete/rois . . . cumma/xois: the speech concludes with a trimeter, as shown by Meineke, Hermes iii. p. 347. Cf. i. 80. 6; iv. 17. 6, and the hexameters ii. 49. 18; vi. 36. 1.

Diodotus replies to Cleon.

*dio/dotos: of Diodotus, to whom Thucydides has raised in the following speech a splendid monument, nothing is known historically, not even whether his father Eucrates was the stuppeiopw/lhs among the successors of Pericles (Ar. Eq. 129; cf. CIA. iv. 179 a), or the brother of Nicias. See Roscher, Leben etc. des Thuk. p. 411.—2.

o(/sper kai\ . . . *mutilhnai/ous: cf. c. 36. 25.—

a)nte/lege . . . mh\ a)poktei=nai *mutilhnai/ous: spoke most against putting the Mytileneans to death. Cf. v. 49. 11 a)nte/legon mh\ dikai/ws sfw=n katadedika/sqai, Xen. Anab. ii. 3. 25; Cyrop. ii. 2. 20. For the inf. with mh/ after verbs of denial, see GMT. 807; H. 1029; Kr. Spr. 67, 12, 3. SPEECH OF DIODOTUS. c. 42-48.

Reconsideration of the question can be only helpful. The worst enemies of safe conclusions are haste and passion, and whoever disputes the utility of speeches is either a fool, or has a personal interest in the matter. The latter is the case with those who, in order to support a bad cause, resort to slander and intimidation. Orators should renounce such means, and the state should treat with consideration not only those counsellors that usually give good advice, but even those that are not so fortunate.

th\n diagnw/mhn: used by Thuc. alone of Attie writers. Cf. c. 67. 33; i. 87. 17; and diegnwsme/nhn, c. 53. 22; die/gnwsto, i. 118. 18. The reference is to c. 38. § 1.—2.

memfome/nous: referring to the future, not, as usual, to the past, reproachfully warning. The reference is to c. 37. § 3.— 3.

peri\ tw=n megi/stwn: not from the point of view of the memfo/menoi, but of the speaker; the former would demand peri\ mhdeno\s polla/kis bouleu/esqai, the latter finds fault that this is not to be done even peri\ tw=n megi/stwn. —4.

te: with the best Mss. instead of de/. It is not correlative to ou)/te, ou)/te, but introduces the third member. Steup follows Bk., with a few Mss., in writing de/, on the ground that the clause nomi/zw . . . o)rgh/n is antithetic to the preceding.—

du/o ta\ e)nantiw/tata: acc. to the analogy of c. 40. 6; 57. 15; 75. 5; i. 74. 3; 122. 22, these words are not to be construed as subj. and pred., but are equiv. to ta\ du/o e)nantiw/tata, so that the subj. is ta/xos te kai\ o)rgh/n, “that the two worst fores of correct conclusions are haste and passion.”—

eu)bouli/a|: cf. 44. 4; and eu)= bouleu/esqai, c. 48. 7.—

ta/xos: cf. c. 38. 3 ff.—

o)rgh/n: cf. c. 36. 5; 44. 15.—5.

to\ me/n, to\ de/: the former refers to ta/xos, the latter to o)rgh/. “Overhaste generally indicates lack of sense; passion, lack of self-control and shallowness of judgment.”—

filei=: is wont, in Thuc. in this sense only; and in Hdt., except in v. 5. 5. See on i. 78. 5.—

gi/gnesqai: appear, often used of natural phenomena. See on i. 54. 6. —

meta\ a)paideusi/as: cf. c. 84. 7 a)paideusi/a| o)rgh=s e)kfero/menoi, and the Tragic frag. quoted by Stob. Flor. 20. 12 (Nauck, Trag. Gr.^{2}, Adespota 523) po/ll) e)/stin o)rgh=s e)c a)paideu/tou kaka/.— —6. kai\ braxu/thtos gnw/mhs: cf. Dio C. frg. p. 64 taxu\ me\n u(po\ braxu/thtos gnw/mhs o)rgizome/nhn. braxu/ths, shallowness, acc. to the usual sense of braxu/s in Thuc. See on i. 14. 11.

tou/s te lo/gous kte(.: the order as in c. 39. 5. The clause is directed against c. 38. § 4 ff. Cf. ii. 40. 9 ff. —7.

diama/xetai: see on c. 40. 5.— —

didaska/lous . . . gi/gnesqai: see on c. 2. 11.—8.

h)\ i)di/a| ti au)tw=| diafe/rei: or he has some private interest. Cf. tw=n au)toi=s i)di/a| diafo/rwn, i. 68. 8; ta\ i)dia dia/fora, ii. 37. 5; i)/dia/ tina dia/fora, v. 115. 8. Cf. also iv. 86. 23.— 10.

fra/sai: to throw light on. See on i. 145. 4.—11.

eu)= ei)pei=n: sneered at by Cleon, c. 38. 18; 40. 13; here assigned its true value.—

ou)k a)\n h(gei=tai: a)/n, which belongs to du/nasqai, separates the closely connected ou)x h(gei=tai. Cf. c. 37. 7 ou)k e)pikindu/nws h(gei=sqe kte(. On the partiality of a)/n for the neg., see GMT. 219; H. 862. ou) in prot. because it negatives a single word. GMT. 384; H. 1028; Kr. Spr. 67, 4, 1.—12.

eu)= de\ diabalw\n . . . a)kousome/nous: excellent characterization of Cleon's whole speech, esp. of c. 38. eu)= is bitterly ironical.

xalepw/tatoi . . . tina: most dangerous, however, are just those who charge beforehand rhetorical display for the sake of money. xalepw/tatoi as in iv. 24. 21; vii. 21. 14. kai/, just (erst), as in Hdt. i. 71. 6, and freq.—

e)pi\ xrh/masi: placed for emphasis after oi(, limits e)pi/deicin, the prep. having the same force (for the sake of) as in i. 3. 9; 38. 15; 73. 14; ii. 29. 17; 64. 25. v. H. conjectured e)pidei/cein tina/, the obj. to be supplied, that one will display his art for money. Cf. Ar. Acharn. 765. —

prokathgorou=ntes: this reading of Laur., adopted by St. and v. H. instead of proskathgorou=ntes of most Mss., is in place after the fut. partic. tou\s a)nterou=ntas (l. 13). The charge of venality (cf. c. 38. 12; 40. 2, 13) might well be treated as the worst form of eu)= diaba/llein (l. 12), but not as something additional to this.—16.

a)cunetw/teros h)\ a)dikw/teros: the double comp., as in Lat., implies that of two qualities in the same obj. one predominates. H. 645; Kühn. 543, 5. See on i. 21. 5. —

a)pexw/rei: withdraw. The verb is used in the same unfavourable sense as the Lat. discedere. Cf. Dem. xxxvii. 21.—17.

a)diki/as e)piferome/nhs: when corruption is charged. The a)diki/a is to\ e)pi\ xrh/masi le/gein. e)pife/rein as in c. 46. 26; 81. 20; v. 75. 9.—18.

tuxw/n: see on c. 39. 42. Cf. e)pituxw/n, —meta\ a)cunesi/as: meta/, besides, as in i. 32. 8; ii. 15. 9. —

a)/dikos: sc. gi/gnetai, in the judgment of the many.

e)n tw=| toiw=|de: as in c. 43. 12; ii. 36. 2; v. 88. 1, the art. refers to what is known or just deseribed. The prep. has the same force as in e)n w(=|, e)n tou/tw|. See on i. 39. 11.—

tw=n cumbou/lwn: only here in the general sense of “advising statesmen,” as in Dem. xviii. 66. Elsewhere Thuc. uses it of Spartan officials with specific duties. Cf. c. 69. 7; ii. 85. 1; v. 63. 15; viii. 39. 7; 41. 3.—20.

plei=st) a)\n o)rqoi=to: see on c. 30. 15; 37. 26. For the sentiment of the passage, cf. Eur. Bacch. 270; Or. 907.—21.

tou\s toiou/tous tw=n politw=n: referring to those deseribed in l. 11 ff., esp. oi( e)pi\ xrh/masi proskathgorou=ntes,

e)la/xista: opp. to plei=sta above. It is cognate acc. with a(marta/nein. Cf. c. 40. 12.—22.

peisqei=en: the transition to the plur. is induced by tw=n politw=n in the line above. Kr. Spr. 58, 4, 2. Cf. c. 72. 8; viii. 72. 13. On the shorter form peisqei=en for peisqei/hsan of the Mss., see St. Qu. Gr.^{2} p. 62, who cites Heracleides Milesius (Eustath. on Hom. y 195), h( a)rxai/a *)atqi\s ta\ eu)ktika\ cugko/ptei kat) e)cai/resin mia=s cullabh=s.—23. mh\ e)kfobou=nta . . . le/gonta: the const. is fai/nesqai a)/meinon le/gonta, mh\ e)kfobou=nta . . . a)ll) a)po\ tou= i)/sou. The good citizen must show himself the better speaker, not by intimidation of his opponents, but by meeting them on equal terms. a)po\ tou= i)/sou, as in c. 10. 12 = a)po\ th=s i)/shs, c. 40. 31.— 24.

th\n de\ sw/frona po/lin . . . u(parxou/shs: the wise city should not indeed confer additional honour on him whose counsels are generally sound, but also not lessen that which he already has. bouleu/ein, give advice, as in vi. 39. 5; viii. 76. 33. prostiqe/nai timh/n as in Xen. Cyrop. ii. 2. 18. Cf. c. 39. 32. a)lla\ mhd) e)lassou=n th=s u(parxou/shs seems, as Arn. says, to refer to pei/sas te u(/poptos gi/gnetai (l. 17). Cf. (concerning Antiphon) viii. 68. 8 u(po/ptws tw=| plh/qei dia\ do/can deino/thtos diakei/menos.—26. to\n mh\ tuxo/nta gnw/mhs: the one who is not fortunate in his view, i.e. whose advice is not so good. Cf. gnw/mhs a(marta/nein, i. 33. 17; vi. 92. 3; sfa/llesqai th=s do/chs, iv. 85. 5. Or, perhaps, the one whose advice is rejected, as mh\ tuxw/n, This rendering seems to be sustained by l. 28 f. Cf. th=s e(ka/stou do/chs tuxei=n, ii. 35. 19. Cf. Dio C. lii. 33. 7 tou\s me\n tuxo/ntas th=s gnw/mhs kai\ e)pai/nei kai\ ti/ma, . . . tou\s d' a(marto/ntas mh/t) a)tima/sh|s pote\ mh/t) ai)tia/sh|. Also xliv. 36. 3. See on c. 39. 42.—27.

ou)x o(/pws, a)lla\ mhde/: non modo non, sed ne . . . quidem. When the ou)x o(/pws clause precedes, it always contains the weaker of the two contrasted notions. See on i. 35. 12. GMT. 707; Kühn. 525, 3 b.

h(/kista a)/n: belongs to both following clauses. —

e)pi\ tw=| e)/ti meizo/nwn a)ciou=sqai: i.e. if timh\n prostiqe/nai were the sure reward of every successful speech.—29.

para\ gnw/mhn ti le/goi: cf. vi. 9. 12, and see on c. 37. 28.—

pro\s xa/rin: “to please the people.” Cf. ii. 65. 35 pro\s h(donh/n ti le/gein, Dem. iii. 3 pro\s xa/rin dhmhgorei=n, iv. 38 pro\s h(donh\n dhmhgorei=n. In l. 30 the expression takes the form xari/zesqai, the clause xarizo/meno/s ti kai\ au)to/s, seeking applause also himself, being explanatory of tw=| au)tw=|. —30. prosa/gesqai: win over, as in c. 43. 7; 91. 7, etc.

But, unfortunately, this is not the case with us. Besides, your inordinate propensity to reject proposals, through suspicion of self-interest on the part of the orators that urge them, makes it difficult to put through good measures. Still, in such important matters, we orators must look further into the future than you, espeeially since we alone are held responsible.

w(=n: see on c. 39. 1. For gen. after ta)nanti/a, see G. 1146; H. 754 f; Kr. Spr. 48, 13, 4. The reference is to c. 42. 24 tw=| te pl:ei=sta . . . a)tima/zein.—h)/n tis kai\ . . . le/gein: u(popteu/htai belongs strietly only to ke/rdous e(/neka, some such word as dokh=| being understood with ta\ be/ltista le/gein. The reverse would be the natural order of the clauses in English. “Even though one seem to say what is best, if he be suspected of speaking for money.” On the correlation, see Kr. Spr. 69, 16, 1.—3.

th=s ou) bebai/ou dokh/sews tw=n kerdw=n: beeause of the unproved suspicion of gain, i.e. begrudging him the gain which we suspect he has got, although the suspicion is unproved. Cf. ii. 35. 9 e)n w(=| mo/lis: kai\ h( do/khsis th=s a)lhqei/as bebaiou=tai. do/khsis, as in c. 45. 6; ii. 35. 9; 84. 4; iv. 18. 21; 55. 16; 87. 2; 126. 17; vi. 64. 15; vii. 67. 3; Hdt. vii. 185. 3. ‘Often in Tragedy and late writers, but avoided in simple Attic prose.’ (Kr.) Cf. Soph. Trach. 426, 427; O. T. 681; Ant. 324; Eur. Hel. 36, 121; Heracl. 395.— 4.

th\n fanera\n w)feli/an th=s po/lews a)fairou/meqa: antithesis to the foregoing. We deprive the city of an undeniable advantage. a)fairei=sqai/ ti/ tinos as in c. 58. 29; vii. 13. 18; viii. 46. 33. G. 1118; H. 748 a.

kaqe/sthke: it has come to pass, with dependent inf., as i. 76. 11; iv. 97. 11.—5.

a)po\ tou= eu)qe/os lego/mena: said right out. Cf. e)k tou= profanou=s, See on e)k tou= eu)qe/os, i. 34. 10.—7.

ta\ deino/tata: the worst measures. Cf. c. 59. 17; 82. 59; 93. 5.—

a)pa/th|, (8)

yeusa/menon, (10)

mh\ e)capath/santa: cf. Cleon's words, c. 38. 12 ke/rdei e)pairo/menos to\ eu)prepe\s tou= lo/gou e)kponh/sas para/gein peira/setai. —8. yeusa/menon pisto\n gene/sqai: obtain credence by false representations.

mo/nhn te po/lin . . . a)du/naton: the conclusion drawn from the foregoing. And ours is the only city which it is impossible, on account of this overshrewdness, to benefit openly without deceiving it. mo/nhn po/lin is pred. to h(ma=s, or th\n h(mete/ran po/lin, understood. Kr., Cl., and St. take mo/nhn alone as pred. to po/lin, which would make po/lin, a state, the antithesis to individuals. But, as Jow. says, Diodotus cannot mean to say this of every state, nor is there any reason for, or hint in the context of, any greater liability to such suspicions on the part of the state than on the part of the individual. peri/noia, in this sense, is not found elsewhere, but acc. to analogy of periousi/a, periergi/a, perite/xnhsis (c. 82. 22), means an excess of cleverness which will not be content with a simple view of things. Cf. Ar. Ran. 958 a(/panta perinoei=n. The pl. because of its manifestations everywhere apparent. The positive and negative modifiers, e)k tou= profanou=s and mh\ e)capath/santa, without connective, as in c. 59. 4.—11.

a)nqupopteu/etai: coined for the occasion, as is freq. the case with Thuc.'s compounds. Cf. c. 12. 12, 13 a)ntepibouleu=sai, a)ntimellh=sai, c. 40. 9 a)ntoiktiou=ntas, c. 44. 11 a)ntisxurizo/menos, c. 61. 16 a)ntipa/sxein. For forty such a(/pac ei)rhme/na compounds with a)nti-, see App. on iv. 80. 4.—

a)fanw=s th| ple/on e(/cein: that in some underhand manner he will reap some advantage. Arn. compares Arist. Rhet. iii. 16. 9 a)pistou=si ga\r a)/llo ti pra/ttein e)ko/nta plh\n to\ cumfe/ron.

xrh\ de\ . . . skopou/ntwn: “still, with reference to the highest interests and under such circumstances as the present, we must deem it our duty to base our counsels on a somewhat wider forecast than your offhand deliberations allow.”—

pro\s ta\ me/gista: cf. pro\s to\ paro\n au)ti/ka, c. 40. 35.—

kai/: = atque. Steup follows Haase (Lucubr. p. 42) in taking it as = etiam.—

e)n tw=| toiw=|de: as in c. 42. 19; ii. 36. 2; v. 88. 1. Cf. e)n tw=| toiou/tw|, c. 81. 23; iv. 56. 4.— 13.

a)ciou=n ti: Reiske's conjecture (in Abresch, Dilucc. Thuc. p. 319) for a)ciou=nti of the Mss. See Haase, Lucubr. p. 36 sqq., who rightly remarks that an adj. cannot be joined to such a partic. The emendation has been adopted also by Kr., St., and Bm. The subj. is h(ma=s, we orators. Cf. c. 37. 27. But Steup follows Bm., who understands u(ma=s as subj. and renders a)ciou=n, grant (annehmen). ti belongs to peraite/rw.— pronoou=ntas: cf. c. 38. 28.—14.

di) o)li/gou: temporal, as in i. 77. 22; ii. 85. 9.—

u(peu/qunon th\n parai/nesin: they were liable to the grafh\ parano/mwn. For parai/nesin, cf. parainei=n, c. 37. 28.—15.

pro/s: as against, as in c. 56. 16; 112. 21; ii. 87. 23; 91. 18; 100. 21; v. 80. 15.—

a)neu/qunon: as in Hdt. iii. 80. 11; Arist. Polit. ii. 9. Hence v. H.'s conjecture a)nupeu/qunon is unnecessary.—

a)kro/asin: not simply hearing, but hearkening to, as the context shows. Cf. ii. 37. 16.

swfrone/steron: i.e. with greater circumspection and moderation.—

pro\s o)rgh\n h(/ntina tu/xhte: “according to the passion of the moment.” pro\s o)rgh/n, as in ii. 65. 36; Soph. El. 369. Cf. c. 44. 14. h(/ntina without prep. repeated, as in c. 17. 1; 18. 1; and with subjv. without a)/n, as in iv. 17. 6; 18. 13. GMT. 540; Kr. Spr. 54, 15, 3. St. writes h(/ntin) a)/n. As to the elliptieal use of tu/lhte, cf. viii. 48. 37, and see on i. 142. 25. A grammatical supplement is doubtless to be assumed as original, but is not present to the mind of the speaker. Kr., Jow., Bm., and others supply zhmiou=ntes with tu/xhte, while Arn. construes it with sfale/ntes.—18. e)/stin o(/te: belongs to sfale/ntes, as well as to zhmiou=te.—19. ei) . . . cunech/marton: a fact expressed in hypothetical form. See on c. 32. 6.

The affair of the Mytileneans must be treated not as a question of right, but solely of our interest, which certainly cannot be subscrved by Cleon's proposed death-penalty for all Mytileneans.

ou)/te a)nterw=n: sc. tw=| *kle/wni. Cf. c. 38. 7; 41. 2; 42. 13, 23.—2.

ou)/te kathgorh/swn: sc. tw=n *mutilhnai/wn. —ou) ga\r . . . eu)bouli/as: “for, if we consider wisely, we shall find that for us it is a question not of their wrong-doing, but of our right counsel.” The same brachylogy in i. 40. § 2; vi. 11. § 7. See Steup, Thuk. Stud. ii. p. 18.

a)diki/as: cf. c. 38. 8; 39. 2, 31.—4.

eu)bouli/as: c. 42. 4. —

pa/nu: common in cond. sents. with conjs. or partics., vel maxime, ever so. Cf. ii. 13. 35; 51. 6; vi. 17. 32; viii. 50. 22; 71. 5.—5.

cumfe/ron: without e)sti/ also vi. 85. 2, as a)/cion, deino/n, di/kaion, ai)sxro/n, and similar neuters. Cf. c. 59. 9, 23. Kr. Spr. 62, 1, 4; 65, 5, 11.—6.

h)/n te kai\ e)/xonta/s ti cuggnw/mhs: sc. a)pofh/nw. So Cl., St., and Bm. explain, adopting e)/xontas, the reading of the Clarend. Ms., instead of the vulg. e)/xontes. Against Cleon's brutal demand (c. 40. 1 ou)k ou)=n dei= proqei=nai e)lpi/da . . . w(s cuggnw/mhn . . . lh/yontai) Diodotus offers his own view as modestly as possible; hence e)/xontas ti cuggnw/mhs (cf. ii. 49. 30; 51. 29). cuggnw/mh, excuse, as in c. 40. 2.—

e)a=n: Lindau's and Burgess's conjecture for ei)=en, adopted by Dind., St., Bm., and Bl. It depends on ou) dia\ tou=to keleu/sw, and means to let go unpunished. For the const., cf. Plato Euthyphr. 4 b ei) me\n e)n di/kh|, e)a=n, ei) de\ mh/, e)pecie/nai. “And if I show that they have some claim to forgiveness, I will not on that account advise you to let them go unpunished, if this should appear disadvantageous to the state.” See App.

h)\ tou= paro/ntos: without peri/ repeated. Kr. Spr. 68, 9; Kühn. 451, 6. See on c. 43. 17; vii. 47. 16. —

kai\ tou/tou o(\ ma/lista kte(.: tou/tou, which is Steup's emendation for tou=to of the Mss., depends on ta)nanti/a, If tou=to be retained, there would seem to be, as Bm. says, a slight anacoluthon, tou=to being repeated, in part of its idea, in peri\ tou= e)s to\ me/llon kalw=s e)/xontos. Cl., who with Pp. and Kr., connects tou=to grammatically with a)ntisxurizo/menos, explains that it is not really the obj. of the partic., but is placed first with almost the force of an abs. acc., as to that which. See on c. 15. 4; i. 32. 17. So also St. But Steup objects that tou=to o(/ is nowhere else so used, though o(/ alone, in this sense, occurs in other writers (cf. Xen. Anab. v. 5. 20; vi. 1. 29, and see Kr. 51, 13, 13).— 9.

i)sxuri/zetai: maintains, as in v. 26. 19; vi. 55. 2; vii. 49. 1, 23.—

e)s to\ loipo\n kte(.: cf. c. 39. § 7, 8; 40. § 8. The clause is epexegetical to tou/tou o(/. e)s to\ loipo/n also iv. 128. 21; vi. 75. 16.—10.

pro\s to\ h(=sson a)fi/stasqai: sc. tou\s cumma/xous. Cf. viii. 76. 25 pro\s to\ perigi/gnesqai tw=n polemi/wn h( po/lis sfi/si xrh/simos h)=n.—qa/naton zhmi/an: also ii. 24. 9.—

proqei=si: cf. c. 82. 61; ii. 46. 5, and pro/keitai, c. 45. 1. The partic. agrees with u(mi=n understood after cumfe/ron e)/sesqai. Cf. i. 118. 20 ei) polemou=sin a)/meinon e)/stai, Lys. xxv. 27 ou)k a)/cio/n e)sti tou/tois xrh=sqai polla/kis cumbou/lois oi)=s ou)de\ a(/pac e)lusite/lhse peiqome/nois. —11. a)ntisxurizo/menos ta)nanti/a gignw/skw: I emphatically assert the contrary.

kai\ ou)k a)ciw= u(ma=s . . . a)pw/sasqai: and I demand that you reject not, etc. See on i. 102. 17.—

tw=| eu)prepei=: on account of the seeming fairness, as in c. 38. 12. Schol. piqalogi/a|. Cf. eu)pre/peia, c. 11. 10.—14.

dikaio/teros: i.e. based more on strict justice, as tw=| dikai/w| lo/gw| nu=n xrh=sqe, i. 76. 14.—

pro\s th\n nu=n u(mete/ran o)rgh/n: in your present anger, belongs to e)pispa/saito. See on c. 43. 17. Cf. c. 36. 5; 42. 4.—15.

e)s *mutilhnai/ous: for position after o)rgh/n, freq. in Thuc., see on c. 54. 18; i. 11. 19. G. 968; Kühn. 464, 1; Kr. Spr. 50, 9, 9.—

ta/xa a)\n e)pispa/saito: may perhaps attract you. Cf. v. 111. 15. —16.

h(mei=s de\ ou) dikazo/meqa pro\s au)tou/s: but we are not at law with them. dika/zesqai, as in i. 77. 7; Xen. Cyrop. i. 2. 7. Arn. compares, for the sentiment, Arist. Rhet. i. 3 te/los tw=| me\n sumbouleu/onti to\ sumfe/ron kai\ blabero/n, toi=s de\ dikazome/nois to\ di/kaion kai\ to\ a)/dikon.—tw=n dikai/wn: strict justice, as in c. 54. 1; Dem. xviii. 7.— 17.

o(/pws xrhsi/mws e(/cousin: sc. h(mi=n, how they shall be useful to us, i.e. how best to effect this, whether by severe punishment, or mild treatment.

Mankind are so constituted that not even the danger of the deathpenalty will keep either individuals or states from transgressions.

e)n ou)=n tai=s po/lesi kte(.: the diseussion announced above (c. 44. § 3 f.), as to whether the interests of Athens will be subserved by inflicting the death-penalty on the Mytileneans, is introduced with a general remark on the inadequaey of punishments, even of the death-penalty, to suppress crime. At the beginning of the next chapter the transition to the present case, for which Cleon had maintained (c. 44. 9 f.), e)s to\ loipo\n cumfe/ron e)/sesqai pro\s to\ h(=sson a)fi/stasqai qa/naton zhmi/an proqei=si, is made with ou)k ou)=n xrh/. Kühn. 508, N. 2. This chapter represents the earliest attempt to combat the theory that men are deterred from crime by fear of punishment. See M. Büdinger. Sitzungsberichte d. phil.-hist. Kl. d. Wiener Akad. xcvi. p. 384.—

pollw=n: be longs with a(marthma/twn, from which it is only locally separated by the almost parenthetical ou)k i)/swn . . . e)lasso/nwn.—qana/tou zhmi/a: although, acc. to the analogy of c. 44. 10 and ii. 24. 9, qa/natos might have been expected (as Cobet suggests, Nov. Lect. p. 771), still the gen. is sufficiently protected by c. 46. 1 tou= qana/tou th=| zhmi/a|. Also in Isocr. viii. 50 qana/tou th=s zhmi/as e)pikeime/nhs, qana/tou must be considered a limiting genitive.—

pro/keitai: pass. of proqei=nai, c. 44. 10.—3.

th=| e)lpi/di e)pairo/menoi: as i. 81. 11. See on c. 37. 28; 38. 12.—4.

katagnou\s e(autou= mh\ perie/sesqai: passing sentence of failure on himself, lit. deciding against himself that he will not succeed. katagignw/skein of unfavourable judgment, as in vi. 34. 51; vii. 51. 3; Xen. Cyrop. vi. 1. 36 au)to\s e)mautou= kate/gnwn mh\ a)\n karterh=sai. See on c. 16. 1. Kühn. 476, 2.—5.

h)=lqen e)s to\ deino/n: as in c. 39. 17.

po/lis te: and so a state. The subj. placed first before the interr. pron. has almost the same character of generality as before the dem., having nearly the effect of the part. genitive. See on i. 1. 8.—

ti/s pw: no exception to the general rule that pw is used in neg. sents., since the interr. sent. is here equiv. to a negative.—6.

h(/ssw th=| dokh/sei: in its view insufficient. See on c. 43. 3.— 7.

h)\ a)/llwn cummaxi/a|: co-ordinated with oi)kei/an the phrase has almost the force of an adjective.—

tou/tw|: sc. tw=| a)fi/stasqai.

pefu/kasi de\ . . . a(marta/nein: cf. c. 84. 10, and Dio C.'s imitation, lii. 34. 6 polla\ ga\r h( fu/sis kai\ para\ to\n no/mon pollou\s a(marta/nein e)ca/gei, Soph. Ant. 1023 a)nqrw/poisi ga\r toi=s pa=si koino/n e)sti tou)camarta/nein, Eur. Hipp. 1433 a)nqrw/poisi qew=n dido/ntwn ei)ko\s a(marta/nein. Cl. writes de/, for te of the Mss., making the clause epexegetical. Cf. i. 55. 9; v. 10. 21.—9.

diecelhlu/qasi dia\ pasw=n: cf. Dem. ii. 5 pa/nta diecelhlu/qamen, and Xen. Cyrop. i. 2. 15 oi( gerai/teroi dia\ pa/ntwn tw=n kalw=n e)lhluqo/tes.—10. prostiqe/ntes: always adding to, aggravating the punishments. Cf. Dem. iv. 20.—

ei)/ pws: if haply. The real apod. is distinctly implied, but not formally expressed. GMT. 489; H. 907; Kr. Spr. 65, 1, 10. Cf. i. 58. 2; ii. 67. 5; iv. 11. 12.— —11.

kai\ ei)ko/s: not introducing a new consideration, but confirming the foregoing general remark (diecelhlu/qasi/ ge . . . kakourgw=n).—12.

kei=sqai: here and c. 47. 13 (e)pikei=sqai, c. 70. 17; viii. 15. 6) of punishments, as ii. 46. 6 of rewards, ii. 37. 17 of laws, always as pf. pass. of tiqe/nai. —parabainome/nwn: as transgressions occurred. So with Bm., who compares, for the gen. abs. without expressed subject, i. 7. 2 ploi+mwte/rwn, i. 116. 15 e)saggelqe/ntwn. GMT. 848; H. 972 a. But St. understands tw=n zhmiw=n as subj., and gives parabainome/nwn the more general sense of disregarding, citing Aeschin. iii. 204 ou) tou\s no/mous mo/non parabe/bhken, a)lla\ kai\ to\n kairo\n th=s a)narrh/sews kai\ to\n to/pon, Dem. xxiv. 32 paraba\s to\n xro/non to\n e)k tw=n no/mwn. Cf. also Din. i. 36 parabebhkw\s a(/pantas tou\s parelhluqo/tas kairou/s.—13. tw=| xro/nw| . . . a)nh/kousi: cf. Lycurg. in Leocr. 65 (oi( a)rxai=oi nomoqe/tai) o(moi/ws e)pi\ pa=si kai\ toi=s e)laxi/stois paranomh/masi qa/naton w(/risan ei)=nai th\n zhmi/an. The phrase a)nh/kein e)s, to express highest intensity, occurs only here in Thuc., and is elsewhere unusual in Attie (Soph. Trach. 1018), but common in Hdt. (ii. 104. 8; v. 49. 16; vii. 9. g 4; 13. 6; 134. 13; viii. 111. 12).—14.

ka)n tou/tw| o(/mws parabai/netai: and under these circumstances transgressions occur all the same. ka)n tou/tw| is Kr.'s conjecture for kai\ tou=to of the Mss. Cf. i. 37. 15; 81. 9; ii. 89. 37. If the reading of the Mss. be retained, St.'s explanation is best, namely tou=to =to\ e)s to\n qa/naton ta\s polla\s a)nh/kein, and parabai/netai, is disregarded, as in Jow. explains: ‘tou=to refers to qa/natos, but parabai/netai is said inaccurately, not of death, but of the law which is sanctioned by the penalty of death. So parabainome/nwn really refers to the idea of a law contained in zhmiw=n just above.’ See App.

de/os: terror; fear, for the thing feared, as metus for periculum. —

to/de: used perhaps to avoid repetition of the same pronoun (tou/tou). Cf. Soph. Ant. 296 tou=to kai\ po/leis porqei=, to/d) a)/ndras e)cani/sthsin do/mwn. —e)pi/sxei: Schol., kwlu/ei.—16. a)ll) h( me\n . . . kindu/nous: but porerty, making men bold from necessity, and wealth, making them ambitious from insolence and pride, and the other relations of life, through passion, as each relation is enslared by some mighty and invincible impulse, lure mankind to destruction. a)na/gkh| and u(/brei kai\ fronh/mati belong to pare/xousa, while o)rgh=| belongs to e)ca/gousin and answers to the pare/xousa clauses above. Cl. changes tw=n a)nqrw/pwn of the Mss. into to\n a)/nqrwpon. St. rejects these words and writes o)rgh/n (libidinem) for o)rgh=|, on the ground that it is demanded by the correspondence to to/lman and pleoneci/an. See App. With the sentiment, cf. Eur. El. 375 peni/a e)/xei no/son, dida/skei a)/ndra th=| xrei/a| kako/n, Arist. Rhet. i. 12 a)dikou=si, o(/soi a)\n e)ndeei=s w)=si: dixw=s de/ ei)sin e)ndeei=s: h)\ ga\r w(s a)nagkai/ou, w(/sper oi( pe/nhtes: h)\ w(s u(perbolh=s, w(/sper oi( plou/sioi, Dion. H. i. 25 h( a)na/gkh i(kanh/ e)sti toi=s a)poroume/nois bi/ou: to/lman parasxei=n.—17. e)cousi/a: opes, Va. Cf. i. 38. 13; 123. 6; vi. 31. 33.—

fronh/mati: in Thuc. always self-confidence, spirit. See on i. 81. 14.—18.

cuntuxi/ai: conditions of life, as in c. 82. 14. Cf. c. 112. 26; i. 33. 1; v. 11. 17; vi. 54. 2; vii. 57. 5.—19.

u(p) a)nhke/stou tino\s krei/ssonos: it is possible to supply simply o)rgh=s, but better perhaps to take krei/ssonos as neut., as most of the editt. seem to do, and render, by some mighty and invincible impulse. a)nh/kestos has the meaning insatiable, unappeasable, acc. to the const. a)kei=sqai paqh/mata. Cf. also Hom. N 115 a)kestai/ toi fre/nes e)sqlw=n.—e)ca/gousin: as in vi. 89. 22 = para/gein. Cf. Eur. Alc. 1080 e)/rws ti/s m) e)ca/gei, Herc. Fur. 775 a(/ t) eu)tuxi/a fronei=n brotou\s e)ca/getai, ibid. 1212; Ion. 361; Suppl. 79; Dio C. lii. 23. 2; 34. 6.

te: introduces a new consideration, besides; not correl. to kai/.— o( e)/rws: passionate desire. Schol. prw=to/n tis e)ra=|, ei)=ta e)lpi/zei, ei)=ta e)gxeirei=. —e)pi\ panti/: comprehends all the above definite and indefinite cases. Cf. i. 20. 2; iv. 11. 13; v. 100. 4.— 21.

th\n e)piboulh/n: the plot. So Cl. and Steup, with three Mss., for e)pibolh/n, undertaking, which most Mss. have. Hude calls attention to the fact that e)pibou/leuma is used in the same sense in Cf. i. 93. 23; iv. 77. 1; 86. 22; viii. 24. 38. But see App.—

e)kfronti/zwn: thinking out, a rare word found also in Ar. Nub. 695, 697.—22.

u(potiqei=sa: of the delusive suggestions of hope, similarly in i. 138. 8; iv. 65. 18. For the thought, cf. iv. 18. § 3; vii. 61. § 3.— 23.

kai\ o)/nta . . . deinw=n: and being unseen they outweigh the dangers that are seen. o)/nta neut., with the two nouns of different gender. G. 924 a; H. 617 a. o(rw/mena opp. to a)fanh=, as in ii. 42. 21; v. 113. 4.

kai\ h( tu/xh kte(.: as hope had suggested that fortune would lend its support, so the latter too contributes toward leading men astray. tu/xh is here almost personified, now unexpectedly favouring, but again by that very means luring into danger.—

e)p) au)toi=s: besides these. Schol. meta\ to\n e)/rwta kai\ th\n e)lpi/da.—cumba/lletai: see on proscuneba/leto, c. 36. 10. —26.

e)k tw=n u(podeeste/rwn: even with inadequate resources. Schol. a)po\ mikrote/rwn a)formw=n. Cf. ii. 89. 22.—

proa/gei: leads on, even against their will, as in c. 59. 9.—27.

ou)x h(=sson: i.e. ma/lista, as in i. 8. 1, and freq. —

o(/sw|: in so far as, because, even without comparative. See on i. 68. H. Kr. Spr. 51, 10, 5. kinduneu/ousin, or, perhaps better, o( a)gw/n e)sti is to be supplied. See on iv. 63. 12.—

e)leuqeri/as h)\ a)/llwn a)rxh=s: Cl. explains that h)/ offers not a choice, but an alternative, and a)/llwn is subj. gen. But it would seem more natural to render, with Goell. and Jow., freedom or empire. So Valla.—28.

kai\ meta\ pa/ntwn . . . e)do/casen: the force of o(/sw| continues. The causes by which states are drawn into dangerous undertakings are two: 1) for the whole, greater advantages may be won; 2) the individual, in company with many, easily overestimates his own strength. This overestimate on the part of individuals, however, has a hurtful influence on the decisions of the many.—

meta\ pa/ntwn: Schol. tou= koinou=.—29. e)pi\ ple/on ti: the indef. pron. added to the comp. ple/on, as in ii. 11. 32. Cf. h(=sso/n ti, c. 75. 11; a)mele/stero/n ti, ii. 11. 14; ma=llo/n ti, i. 49. 9; ti ma=llon, ii. 22. 4; iv. 21. 16; vii. 57. 4; ti a)nepieike/steron, c. 66. 7.—

au(to\n: for the unintelligible au)tw=n of most good Mss.—

e)do/casen: esp. used of erroneous estimate. Cf. i. 120. 28; Dio C. lxxv. 9 e)pi\ plei=on e)doca/sqh. The aor. is gnomic. GMT. 155; H. 840; Kühn. 386, 7. See on i. 69. 31.

a(plw=s: see on c. 38. 31.—

a)du/naton: const. with a)potroph/n tina e)/xein . . . deinw=|.—30. pollh=s eu)hqei/as: sc. e)sti/n. Cf. i. 83. 4; 142. 24. G. 1091, 1; H. 732 d. This elliptical gen. is much less freq. than in Lat. —

o(/stis: so very hypothetical in foree that it is loosely connected, almost like ei)/ tis, with the leading clause. On this free connexion of the pers. rel. pron. with a neut. adj. or pred. gen., see Kr. Spr. 51, 13, 11; Kühn. 563, 3 d. Cf. the similar const. with o(\s a)/n, ii. 44. 4; vi. 14. 7; vii. 68. 4. So the eonst. is usually explained, but Steup thinks, if o(/stis oi)/etai were so intended, Thuc. would have written pollh\ eu)h/qeia. He pre fers to take o(/stis as used by Diodotus c. 42. 7; 48. 7, and to construe pollh=s eu)hqei/as (sc. e)sti\ with pers. subj.) as gnw/mhs tino\s ei)=nai (see on i. 113. 10). Cf. Hdt. i. 107. 13 oi)ki/hs me\n e)o/nta a)gaqh=s, tro/pou de\ h(suxi/ou. Kr. Spr. 47, 6, 10.—31.

a)potroph/n tina e)/xein: can be deterred. Cf. Dio C.'s imitation of the passage (lv. 16), h( fu/sis h( a)nqrwpi/nh pa/ntws a(marta/nein tina\s a)napei/qei, kai\ a)mh/xano/n e)stin au)th\n pra=cai/ ti w(rmhme/nhn e)pisxei=n.

If therefore we cannot, even by accepting Cleon's proposal, attain certainty for the future, we ought not by pitiless severity to drive those who revolt to desperate resistance, thereby depriving ourselves of the basis of our own power, in that we shall have recovered the cities only after they are ruined.

ou)k ou)=n xrh\ ou)/te tou= qana/tou . . . bouleu/sasqai, ou)/te kte(.: only the first ou)/te clause is strictly a deduction from the argument of c. 45; hence the two ou)/te clauses stand related to each other as the te . . . kai/ clauses in c. 38. 27; ii. 39. 24, the emphasis being on the first.—

e)xeggu/w|: Schol., bebai/w|, i)sxura=| w(s e)gguh=sai duname/nh|. The word seems to be found elsewhere only in Tragedy and late Greek. Cf. Soph. O. C. 284; Eur. Med. 386; Andr. 191; Phoen. 759; Dio C. xliv. 25 e)xeggu/w| pi/stei to\ be/baion pronoh/sete. Cf. feregguw/tatos, viii. 68. 22. —2.

xei=ron bouleu/sasqai: as in i. 73. 7; here a euphemism for qa/naton yhfi/sasqai *mutilhnai/wn. Cf. eu)= bouleu/etai, c. 48. 7; eu)bouli/a, c. 42. 4; 44. 4.—

ou)/te a)ne/lpiston katasth=sai . . . w(s ou)k e)/stai: i.e. ou)k a)ne/lpiston poih=sai to\ metagnw=nai. Cf. c. 40. § 8. The const. a)ne/lpiston katasth=sai toi=s a)posta=sin, as in i. 140. 30; ii. 89. 47; vii. 44. 26; viii. 66. 24.—3.

w(s ou)k e)/stai: pleonastic neg. after a)ne/lpiston. Cf. a)nte/legon w(s ou) kte(., i. 77. 13. H. 1029 a; Kr. Spr. 67, 12, 2; Kühn. 516, 3 b. See on c. 32. 13; i. 77. 13. ou)k e)/stai, it will not be possible, with inf.; in this sense usually with subst. This pregnant force of the verb is freq., esp. after a neg. See on i. 2. 5.—4.

o(/ti e)n braxuta/tw|: the prep. regularly stands after o(/ti, w(s, thus used with a superlative. Kr. Spr. 49, 10, 1; Kühn. 452, N. 3. Cf. o(/ti e)p) e)la/xiston, See on i. 63. 5; ii. 34. 24; and for similar const. in Lat., Madvig on Cic. de Fin. v. 9. 26.—

th\n a(marti/an katalu=sai: suum peccatum eluere. Cf. mei=zon e)/gklhma lu=sai, i. 42. 11; e)gklh/mata katalu=sai, i. 82. 24; dialu/sein th\n diabolh/n, i. 131. 12; lu=sai ta\s pro/teron a(marti/as, Ar. Ran. 691. For the act., where the mid. might have been expected, see Kühn. 375, 2.

nu=n me/n: of the present situation, analogous to the more common nu=n de/, and opp. to e)kei/nws de/ below, as in vi. 11. 9.—

kai/: emphatic with a)posta=sa. Not, as Kr. and Steup, with h)/n. There is a reference to c. 45. § 2, but the emphasis is here on the tense, even after it has revolted. —6.

periesome/nh: as in c. 45. 4.—

e)/lqoi a)/n: softened expression for the regular fut. ind. GMT. 505; H. 901 a. Cf. the reverse form of condition, i. 121. 13.—7.

e)/ti: belongs to ou)=sa.— a)podou=nai, u(potelei=n: aor. of single act of payment of war costs; pres. of regular tribute.—8.

e)kei/nws de/: as in i. 77. 13; vi. 11. 10.—

ti/na h(/ntina ou)k: see on c. 39. 38. This const., as well as the form of expression throughout, shows that outward similarity to Cleon's words, though with opposite purpose, is sought.—9.

paraskeua/sasqai: the aor. is the reading of nearly all the Mss. for the vulg. paraskeua/s esqai. Steup retains the aor., comparing for similar change of tense, as here from paraskeua/saqai to paratenei=sqai, iv. 28. 26, 28; 52. 16, 17; vi. 24. 3, 13; viii. 5. 35. It would seem better, with St., to write the future. See Qu. Gr.^{2} p. 10 sq. But see App. on this passage and on ii. 3. 8.—